JP2020044276A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To expand the range of game property while suppressing the gambling property.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery for determining whether a plurality of types of winning combinations are won or not when a start operation by a player is detected; and control means for forming a game state advantageous to the player. The game that can be executed in one game state includes a first game of a first predetermined number of times at the maximum, a second game that can be executed for a second predetermined number of times at the maximum on the basis of the fact that a combination of symbols related to a predetermined combination is displayed on an effective line in the first game, and a third game that can be executed when a predetermined combination is not won for the third predetermined number of times before the first game of the first predetermined number of times is completed. In the game machine, the net increase in game media per game in the second game is greater than 0 and greater than the net increase in the first game, and the net increase in the third game is greater than 0 and greater than the net increase in the first game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called a pachislot provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit Machines are known. The start switch detects that a start lever has been operated by a player (hereinafter, also referred to as a “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or a coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and detects the rotation of all reels. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel is pressed by a player (hereinafter, also referred to as a "stop operation") and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. I do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. The control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using a random number (hereinafter, referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed on a program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, “internal winning combination”) is performed. ) And the timing of the stop operation, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. In addition, as an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medal or the like) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as “replay”) in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. And the operation of a bonus game in which the chance of paying out game media increases.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a function of navigating the formation of a specific small role (role related to the payout of game media) by a ramp or the like (hereinafter, also referred to as “navi” for short), Gaming machines having a function of time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") have been developed. Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of operating a game state in which a winning probability of replay is higher than usual when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of a replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “RT”) has also been developed. Have been. Further, conventionally, a pachislot having an assist replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “ART”) function in which the AT and the RT operate simultaneously has been developed.

  The above-mentioned gaming machine usually has a main control circuit mounted with a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling main gaming operations of the gaming machine, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of presence or absence of a prize, and the like. The board includes a board and a sub-control board on which a circuit (sub-control circuit) for controlling an effect operation for displaying an image or the like is mounted. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the programs and various table data stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit are developed in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing relating to various game operations is executed. Is done.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the BGM output from the first channel is faded out, the sound effect of one game effect is output from the second channel, and after the sound effect of the one game effect is output. A gaming machine that continuously outputs BGM by fading in BGM output from a first channel has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-209939 A

  However, it is difficult to suppress the gambling property and expand the range of game properties in the above-described conventional techniques.

  The present invention has been made to solve the sixth problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding a range of game properties while suppressing gambling.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1]
An internal lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means 720) for performing an internal lottery for determining whether or not a plurality of types of winning combinations are accepted when a start operation by the player is detected;
Control means (for example, effect control means 780) for forming a gaming state advantageous to the player,
The game that can be executed in one game state is a combination of a maximum of a first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) of the first game and a symbol related to a predetermined combination (for example, replay 2) in the first game. The second game, which can be executed a maximum of a second predetermined number of times (for example, 20 × 3 = 60) based on the information displayed above, and the second game until the first predetermined number of times of the first game ends. A third game that can be executed when the predetermined combination has not been won a third predetermined number of times (for example, three times),
The net addition number (for example, about 4) of game media per one game in the second game is larger than 0 and larger than the net addition number (for example, about 1) in the first game, and The gaming machine (1), wherein the net addition number in the game (for example, about 4) is larger than 0 and larger than the net addition number in the first game.

  According to the above [1], in the first game in which the net increase is smaller than that in the second game, the player is not expected to win the third predetermined number of times (for example, three times). Gaming machines that provide In addition, in the former No. 4 machine, when a puncture occurs, there is a puncture with 1G, but the third game can be executed instead of the 1G, thereby widening the range of game characteristics. In addition, by creating a situation in which the predetermined combination is not won because the probability is relatively long, for example, the adjustment of the 2400 advantageous sections MY (the gambling characteristics) that becomes difficult when the first game is a net increase like the second game. Is suppressed). Further, by suppressing the expected value of the number of game media that can be obtained when the predetermined combination does not win the third predetermined number of times in the first game, as compared with the case of the 1G series, it is easy to adjust 2,400 advantageous sections MY.

[2]
The second game can be further executed based on a combination of symbols related to the predetermined combination being displayed on an active line in the third game,
When the third game is executed, one game state is determined by the sum of the number of winnings of the predetermined combination in the first game and the number of winnings of the predetermined combination in the third game being the third predetermined number of times. Is reached upon completion of the second game at the second predetermined number of times, and the combination of symbols related to the predetermined combination is not displayed on the activated line, although the predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine (1) according to [1], in which the third game may end the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the above [2], one gaming state involving the third game is changed according to the number of winnings of the predetermined combination, while securing the advantage obtained by executing the third game. By ending the game under appropriate conditions, it is possible to realize a highly fair game according to the number of winnings of the predetermined combination.

[3]
The second game is executed every fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) each time a combination of symbols related to the predetermined combination is displayed on the activated line in the first game, and every second time (for example, 20 × 3). = 60 times)
When the third game is not executed, the one game state ends when the second predetermined number of times (for example, the 60th time) ends and the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). The second game may end at the fourth predetermined number of times after the end of the first game at the end of the second game, or may end at the end of the first game at the first predetermined number of times. , [2].

  According to the gaming machine of the above [3], the combination of the first game and the second game is realized in a form close to the former bonus game of the fourth machine, and the special game corresponding to the winning number of the predetermined combination is realized. The game characteristics of three games can be involved.

[4]
The control means shifts the effect state between a plurality of effect states including a special effect state, and effects control means (for example, effect control) for performing a prize assisting effect for assisting winning of a role in the special effect state. Means 780),
The effect control unit may be configured to switch the special effect state to a first special effect state (for example, a first AT state) and a second special effect state (a second AT state or a third AT state) having a higher degree of assistance than the first special effect state. ), The difference between the net increase between the first game and the second game and the difference between the net increase between the first game and the third game A gaming machine (1) according to any one of [1] to [3].

  According to the gaming machine of the above [4], a difference in the net increase between the first game and the second game or between the first game and the third game can be realized using the so-called AT function.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding the range of game properties while suppressing gambling.

It is a figure for explaining a functional flow of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an internal structure of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an internal structure of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a display in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projection block in the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal section of a projection block in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a projection block in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a projection target member moving mechanism in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a projection target block when a trapezoidal member is a projection target of image light in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a state of a projection target block when a false reel member is made into a projection object of image light in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a projection target block when a pseudo reel member is a projection target of image light in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a state of a projected block when a plane screen member is made into a projection object of image light in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a projection target block when a flat screen member is a projection target of image light in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the whole circuit composition provided in the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a main control circuit according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a microprocessor according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a sub control circuit according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the effect registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a technique for creating image data (PJ-compatible image data) of video light projected on various projection members according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram for describing an outline of a technique for generating PJ-compatible image data by virtual projection imaging in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of virtual projection image data generated by a virtual projection operation in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an outline of processing when generating PJ-compatible image data from virtual captured image data in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an outline of generating PJ-compatible image data when a projection target member to be projected includes a movable projection target member in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of image data generation processing executed in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a hardware block diagram regarding sound production in the sub control circuit in one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound data table according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an animation data table according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a video generated according to animation data according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an example of a function related to production processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the image of the telephone scene (listener side) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view of the picture of the telephone scene (speaker side) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a general | schematic flowchart of an example of the sound effect process implement | achieved by the 1st sound effect process part in one Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a schematic flowchart illustrating an example of a second audio reproduction process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic flowchart of an example of the image effect processing realized by the first image effect processing unit in the embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the production process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the production process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an outline flow chart of an example of sound production processing (CH6) realized by the 2nd sound production processing part in one embodiment of the present invention. It is an outline flow chart of an example of sound production processing (CH5) realized by the 2nd sound production processing part in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a general | schematic flowchart of an example of the image effect processing implement | achieved by the 2nd image effect processing part in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the production process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the production process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the production process by a 3rd comparative example. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating another example of the sound data table according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a difference between normal sound data and interrupt sound data in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing other examples of the function related to the production processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a general | schematic flowchart of another example of the sound effect process (CH6) implement | achieved by the 2nd sound effect process part in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating another example of the sound data table according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing other examples of the function related to the production processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a general | schematic flowchart of another example of the sound effect process implement | achieved by the 1st sound effect process part in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating another example of the sound data table according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing other examples of the function related to the production processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a general | schematic flowchart of another example of the sound effect process implement | achieved by the 1st sound effect process part in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for describing an outline of a method for generating PJ-compatible image data according to Modification Example 1 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for describing an outline of a method for generating PJ-compatible image data in Modification Example 2 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a projection matrix and an offset matrix used in a process of generating PJ-compatible image data according to Modification 2 of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing an outline of a method of generating PJ-compatible image data by a texture mapping method according to a third modification of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of image data generation processing executed in a third modification of the present invention. It is an explanatory view of another modification of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a functional block diagram related to game control according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of the symbol of a reel. It is explanatory drawing of the selection condition of an internal lottery table. It is an explanatory view of a winning combination etc. It is an explanatory view of a transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing of a transition of RT state. It is a schematic flowchart which shows an example of the process regarding RT shift control. It is a general | schematic flowchart which shows an example of the process which concerns on internal state provoking effect. It is a figure explaining a functional block of a game machine of an embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an internal lottery table in a game machine of an embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the winning combination of the small role and the replay in the gaming machine of the embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement of the reel in the game machine of the embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the relation between the hitting order (pressing order) and the winning combination of the child and replay stop buttons in the gaming machine according to the embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the relation between the winning combination and the symbol combination in the gaming machine of the embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the gaming machine of the embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the production state in the gaming machine of the embodiment (Example 2) of the present invention. It is a figure explaining transition between an advantageous section and a normal section in a game machine of an embodiment (example 2) of the present invention. It is a flow chart explaining processing in a game machine of an embodiment (example 2) of the present invention. It is a flow chart explaining processing in a game machine of an embodiment (example 2) of the present invention. It is a flow chart explaining processing in a game machine of an embodiment (example 2) of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, a functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislo of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing a game. In addition, as a game medium, for example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals.

  When a player inserts a medal into a pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along an effective line (winning determination line) described later is determined. In addition, the types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning”, in which a bonus such as payout of medals, activation of replays (replay), activation of bonuses, and the like are given to the player, and other so-called “losing”. Such is provided.

  When the start lever is operated, the rotation of the plurality of reels is performed. Thereafter, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the relevant reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means normally sets the combination of the symbols to the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (for four symbols of the symbol). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to be displayed as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels using the specified time so that a combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line.

  When the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped in this way, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is a winning combination. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. When the displayed combination of symbols is determined to be a winning combination by the winning determination unit, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-described game operation, various effects are displayed by using a display device or the like to display an image, output light from various lamps, output sound from a speaker, or a combination thereof. Is performed.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for effect is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time by lottery from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means interlocks with the respective effects such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when a win is determined. Execute In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed at) is provided. Is provided to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of a pachislot according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachislot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2 (main body of the gaming machine). The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that accommodates reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to open and close an opening.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display columns) are provided side by side in a row. Hereinafter, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R includes a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on a peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality (for example, 20) of symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (the rotation direction of the reel).

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot 1.

  The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is formed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by a display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is disposed so as to face a display device 11 described later disposed inside the cabinet 2a.

  The display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the video (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later via the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is formed of a translucent black synthetic resin, thereby suppressing the entrance of external light into the cabinet 2a, and displaying the image (image) displayed by the display device 11. Is clearly visible.

  A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21a and 21b provided above the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (refer to an LED group 85 in FIG. 15 described later), and turns on and off light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents.

  The waist panel 12 is provided substantially at the center of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (an LED included in an LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  The pedestal 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal section 13 includes a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, an adjustment button (not shown), an effect button (not shown) that can be depressed for a special effect, and the like. The operation relating to the medal insertion slot 14 is the insertion of a medal.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps with the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front, and is disposed at a position closer to the player than the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and is provided with three reels. It has a size that allows 3L, 3C, and 3R to be viewed. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 is provided with three consecutively arranged symbols among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel. Two symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three symbols in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in a form of 3 rows × 3 columns). In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R within the frame of the reel display window 4, It is defined as an active line for determining whether or not a winning has been achieved.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by an opening of a frame member 31 provided on the base 13. A substantially horizontal pedestal region is provided below the frame member 31 defining the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player's side, a medal slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and a MAX bet button 15a and a 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

  The medal insertion slot 14 is provided for receiving a medal dropped by the player into the pachislot 1 from outside. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, three) set as an upper limit, and the medals exceeding the predetermined number are deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

  The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided for determining the number of medals stored in the cabinet 2a to be used in one game. Note that a bet button LED (not shown) that lights when a medal can be inserted is provided inside the MAX bet button 15a. The settlement button is provided for pulling out (discharging) medals stored in the pachislot 1 to the outside.

  When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals corresponding to the number of bets (3) per unit game are inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the one bet button 15b is operated three times, medals corresponding to the number of bets (three) per unit game are inserted, and the activated line is activated. Hereinafter, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (the operation of inserting medals for performing a game) are all referred to as “insertion operations”.

  The start lever 16 is provided for starting rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  An information display 6 is provided substantially at the center of the pedestal area in a substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

  The information display 6 has a two-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information of the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as “payout number”) to the player. (Hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and information such as the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") for digitally displaying (notifying) to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the two-digit seven-segment LED for displaying the number of payout medals is a two-digit seven-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information of error occurrence and error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid is switched from the display mode of the number of medals to the display mode of the information of the error type.

  Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a combination determined as an internal winning combination along the activated line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a 2-digit 7-segment LED. Then, the instruction monitor informs the player of necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking or extinguishing the two-digit seven-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified. I do.

  Here, the mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, a case where the push order “1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)” is notified. When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order "2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C)" is notified, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order is displayed. In the case of notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation to the right reel 3R)", this means a mode such as displaying a numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor.

  The information display 6 is electrically connected to a main control board 71 via a door relay terminal plate 68 and a game operation display board 81, as shown in FIG. It is controlled by a main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. The above-described control method for the various 7-segment LEDs is dynamic lighting control.

  In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, a configuration for notifying the information of the stop operation using other means controlled by the sub control board 72 is provided. Specifically, a stop operation is performed by a later-described display device 11 configured by a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described below and a projection block 202 including various projected members (see FIGS. 3 and 5 to 8 described later). Information.

  When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification on the instruction monitor and the mode of notification on other units controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. In other words, the instruction monitor only needs to notify in a form that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value “1” in the instruction monitor). Is displayed, there is a possibility that the content of the notification may not be specified depending on the player, and it cannot be said that the notification is direct.) On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value “1” that uniquely corresponds to the notified push order, but other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like) use the left reel 3L. May be directly notified of instruction information for causing the first stop operation to be performed.

  In the pachislot 1 having such a configuration, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. The presence or absence of the notification of the information of such a stop operation may be controlled according to the game state. For example, in a general game state where navigation does not occur (for example, a non-ART game state or the like), information of a stop operation is reported in a notification game state in which navigation occurs (for example, an ART game state or the like) without reporting the stop operation information. You may do so.

  Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially vertically from a pedestal region of a substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 13 on the front surface of the door body 9. The sub display device 18 is configured by a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

  A touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 15 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when receiving an operation of a player, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to a player operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Having. The sub-display device 18 is controlled by a later-described sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

  In the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout port 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout exit 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 described below to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout exit 24. From the two speaker holes 20L and 20R, sound such as sound effects or music corresponding to the effect contents is output.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the back side of the front door 2b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. Then, the display device 11 is disposed in an upper part in the cabinet 2a.

  The display device 11 includes a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described below, and a projection block 202 including a plurality of types of projection members described later onto which image light emitted from the projector 213 described below is projected. In the projection target block 202, a function (projection target moving mechanism 305 to be described later) for switching the projection target in accordance with a game state is also provided.

  In the display device 11, video light corresponding to image data (PJ-compatible image data described later) generated by image synthesis processing in a virtual space described later is projected onto a predetermined projection target member, and video display effects and the like are performed. Will be Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the shape of the projection target (object) to be projected and the positional relationship (projection distance, angle, and the like) between the projector 213 and the projection target described later. Then, the image light is projected from a projector 213 described later on the surface of the projection target member. By providing such an effect function, an advanced and powerful effect can be performed. The specific configuration and operation of the display device 11 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

  A medal payout device 51 (hereinafter, referred to as a hopper device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are provided in a lower portion in the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the center of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button is pressed to execute the settlement of medals. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout exit 24 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

  The power supply device 53 has a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 15 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts power of an AC voltage of 100 V supplied from a sub power supply device (not shown) into power of a DC voltage required in each unit, and supplies the converted power to each unit.

  A sub-control board case 57 that accommodates a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) is provided above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 is mounted with a sub-control circuit 150 (to be described later, see FIG. 18). The sub control circuit 150 is a circuit that controls execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The sub-control board 72 shows a specific example of the control unit according to the present invention. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 150 will be described later.

  A sub relay board 61 is provided above the sub control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting a sub control board 72 and a main control board 71 described later is mounted. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 to a board disposed around the sub-control board 72 and various devices (units) is mounted.

  Although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 15 described later) is provided in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 15 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). Is a relay board on which wiring for connecting is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is provided at a central portion on the back side of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and main control is provided on the opposite side of the middle door 41 to the reel display window 4 side. A main control board case 55 accommodating a board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later) is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 described later (see FIG. 16 described later). The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit for controlling a main flow of the game in the pachislo 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of presence or absence of a prize. . In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 also controls, for example, a lottery process for determining whether or not a notification game (such as an ART) is determined, a process of displaying navigation information on an instruction monitor, and a process of transmitting various test signals. . The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

  Speakers 65L and 65R are provided below the middle door 41 on the back side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L, 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L, 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  Further, a selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are provided above the speaker 65R. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and the shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the proper medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is disposed diagonally below and to the left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided below the reel display window 4 in an area opened and closed by the middle door 41 with the front door 2 b on the back surface. 15). The door relay terminal plate 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to each of the tester second interface boards 402 is mounted. The various buttons and switches include, for example, a MAX bet button 15a, a bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Configuration of display device>
Next, the configuration of the display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display device 11 includes a projection block 201, and a projection block 202 disposed below the projection block 201. The display device 11 generates image light by a projector 213 described later installed in the projection block 201 and projects the image light on a projection surface of a projection target member (such as a trapezoidal member 302 described later) provided in the projection target block 202. To project.

[Projection block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 201. FIG. 7 is a vertical sectional view of the projection block 201. Note that a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described below shows a specific example of the projection unit according to the present invention.

  The projection block 201 includes a base member 211, a reflection member 212, and a projector 213, as shown in FIG. The base member 211 is formed of a hollow substantially box-shaped member having an open lower surface, and includes an upper plate portion 221, a front plate portion 222, a rear plate portion 223, a left plate portion 224, and a right plate portion 225. Have.

  A projector 213 is attached to the back surface (the surface on the side of the projection block 202) of the upper plate portion 221. Further, the front plate 222 is provided with a reflection member mounting portion 227, and the reflection member mounting portion 227 is formed of a protruding member projecting forward (toward the player) from the front plate portion 222.

  The front piece 234 of the reflection member mounting portion 227 is formed of a plate-like member, and the surface direction of the front surface (the protruding surface of the reflection member mounting portion 227) of the front piece 234 is obliquely upward and the rear surface is obliquely downward. It is inclined to become. The reflection member 212 is attached to the back surface of the front piece 234 (the surface on the side of the projector 213 and the projection target block 202).

  As shown in FIG. 7, the reflecting member 212 has a size (size) substantially equal to that of the front piece 234 and is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular surface, and is fixed to the mirror holder 236. Reflection mirror 237. Note that the mirror holder 236 is fixed to the back surface of the front piece 234 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The reflection mirror 237 is fixed to a surface of the mirror holder 236 on the side of the projector 213 and the projection target block 202. The reflection mirror 237 is inclined so that the surface direction of the reflection surface is obliquely downward, and directs the image light emitted from the projector 213 to a projection target member (such as a trapezoidal member 302 described later) of the projection target block 202. reflect.

  The projector 213 has a projector main body 241 and a mounting bracket 242, as shown in FIG. The mounting bracket 242 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like member, and the projector main body 241 is mounted on the back surface (the surface on the projection block 202 side) of the mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is fixed to the back surface of the upper plate 221 of the base member 211 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The projector main body 241 includes a case 251 (see FIG. 6), an illumination unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a plurality of heat sinks 255, and a plurality of fans 256. FIG. 7 shows only one heat sink 255 and one fan 256.

  The case 251 is formed of a hollow housing. Inside the case 251, an illumination unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a heat sink 255, and a fan 256 are housed. In addition, an opening that is closed by the projection lens 254 is provided on the front surface of the case 251 (on the reflection member 212 side).

  Inside the case 251, a liquid crystal prism unit 253 is arranged behind the projection lens 254 (in a direction opposite to the mirror holder 236), and an illumination unit 252 is arranged behind the liquid crystal prism unit 253. A plurality of heat sinks 255 are arranged around the lighting unit 252, and the plurality of fans 256 are arranged adjacent to the plurality of heat sinks 255.

  The lighting unit 252 has, for example, a plurality of light sources. The plurality of light sources include a light source R (not shown) that emits red light, a light source G (not shown) that emits green light, and a light source B (not shown) that emits blue light. . Therefore, light of three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) enters the liquid crystal prism unit 253, respectively.

  The present invention is not limited to this. For example, one high-intensity discharge lamp may be used as the light source. In this case, the light emitted from the high-intensity discharge lamp is separated into red (R), green (G), and blue (B) light using a color separation mirror (dichroic mirror).

  The liquid crystal prism unit 253 has, for example, three liquid crystal panels and a cross prism (dichroic prism) for color synthesis. The three liquid crystal panels include a liquid crystal panel R (not shown) on which red light is incident, a liquid crystal panel G (not shown) on which green light is incident, and a liquid crystal panel B (not shown) on which blue light is incident. It consists of. The cross prism combines three image lights generated by each liquid crystal panel as one image light.

  The projection lens 254 is arranged to face the reflection mirror 237 of the reflection member 212. Therefore, the image light emitted from the liquid crystal prism unit 253 passes through the projection lens 254 and enters the reflection mirror 237. The plurality of heat sinks 255 radiate heat generated by the lighting unit 252. Further, the plurality of fans 256 blow air to the plurality of heat sinks 255 to cool the plurality of heat sinks 255.

[Projected block]
Next, the configuration of the projection target block 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the projection target block 202. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a moving mechanism of the projection target member provided on the projection target block 202.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the projection block 202 includes a storage case 301, a trapezoid member 302, a pseudo reel member 303, a flat screen member 304, and a projection member moving mechanism 305. Each of the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304 is a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention. Further, the trapezoidal member 302 shows a specific example of the first display unit according to the present invention, and each of the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 is one of the second display units according to the present invention. It shows a specific example. The projection member moving mechanism 305 is a specific example of the movable control unit according to the present invention.

(1) Storage Case The storage case 301 is a hollow housing whose front and top surfaces are open, and has a pedestal portion 311, a rear wall 312, a left wall 313, and a right wall 314. Each wall is formed of a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular surface, the pedestal 311 and the back wall 312 form the bottom and the back of the storage case 301, respectively, and the left side wall 313 and the right side wall 314 respectively The left and right sides of the storage case 301 are formed.

(2) Trapezoidal Member The trapezoidal member 302 is composed of a floor plate portion 321 having a trapezoidal surface and three wall plate portions 322, 323, and 324. Fixed.

  The floor plate portion 321 is mounted on the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311. At this time, the floor plate portion 321 is placed on the pedestal portion 311 so that the lower side (long side) of the floor plate portion 321 is located on the front side (the player side). In addition, the surface 321a (plane) on the opposite side to the surface in contact with the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311 of the floor plate portion 321 is a projection surface. Image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 321a of the floor panel portion 321.

  The wall plate portion 322 is formed of a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular surface, and is formed continuously with the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321. At this time, the wall plate portion 322 is formed continuously with the upper side of the floor plate portion 321 such that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 322 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially perpendicular. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 322 on the front door 2b side (player side) becomes the projection surface 322a. Image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322, similarly to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321.

  The wall plate portion 323 is formed of a plate-shaped member, and is formed continuously with the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 323 is continuously connected to the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322 such that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 323 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially perpendicular. Formed. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 323 on the side of the wall plate portion 324 becomes the projection surface 323a. Since the angle between the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle larger than 90 degrees), the projection surface 323a extends through the opening 10a of the front door 2b. Through the player. Image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323, similarly to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321.

  The wall plate portion 324 is formed of a plate-like member, and is formed continuously with the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 324 is continuously connected to the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322 such that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 324 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially perpendicular. Formed. The plane of the wall plate portion 324 on the side of the wall plate portion 323 becomes the projection surface 324a. Since the angle between the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle larger than 90 degrees), the projection surface 324a extends through the opening 10a of the front door 2b. Through the player. Image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324, similarly to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321.

  In the present embodiment, image light is projected on a partial area of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoidal member 302. The projection planes 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a have a projection area where the image light is projected and a non-projection area where the image light is not projected. Note that silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a. On the other hand, black paint is applied to the non-projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a.

  As described above, by applying black paint to the non-projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a, the reflection of light in the non-projection areas is suppressed, and irregular reflection of light in the cabinet 2a is suppressed. can do. Further, by applying a black paint to the non-projection area, vibration, rotation, collapse, shape change, coloring change, and emphasized expression of a part of the projection target member can be performed.

(3) Pseudo-reel member As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the pseudo-reel member 303 includes an arc-shaped plate portion 331, a pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B (for a rotating arm 332B, see FIG. 11 described later). Is provided.

  The arc plate portion 331 is formed of a plate body extending in an arc shape (a plate body whose side surface extends in an arc shape). Therefore, the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b are formed in the circular arc plate portion 331. On the inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331, decorations related to the type of the pachislot 1 are provided. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface 331b is formed of a smooth curved surface, and serves as a projection surface on which the image light emitted from the projector 213 is projected (see FIG. 11 described later). Further, silver (or gray) paint is applied to the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b of the arc plate portion 331.

  The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are formed continuously on a pair of arc-shaped side surfaces of the arc-shaped plate portion 331, respectively, and have a surface formed of a substantially fan-shaped plate. The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are rotatably supported by support plates 351A and 351B, which will be described later, of the projection target moving mechanism 305, respectively. The pseudo reel member 303 rotates between a standby position in which the inner peripheral surface 331a faces forward (toward the player) and an exposed position in which the outer peripheral surface 331b faces forward. The operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(4) Flat Screen Member As shown in FIG. 8, the flat screen member 304 is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular surface, and has a first flat surface 304a (a lower surface in FIG. 8) and a second flat surface 304b (see FIG. 8). 8 on the upper surface). Silver (or gray) paint is applied to the first flat surface 304 a of the flat screen member 304. On the other hand, a white paint is applied to the second plane 304b, and the second plane 304b serves as a projection plane of image light projected from the projector 213 via the reflection member 212.

  The plane screen member 304 rotates between a standby position where the plane direction of the first plane 304a is obliquely downward and an exposure position where the plane direction of the second plane (projection plane) 304b is forward (the player side). I do. Then, when the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposure position, the image light is projected on the second plane (projection plane) 304b.

  The flat screen member 304 is supported by a pair of crank arms 378A, 378B, described later, of the projection target member moving mechanism 305, and the flat screen member 304 is rotated by the rotation of the pair of crank arms 378A, 378B. The crank arms 378A and 378B are rotatably supported by support plates 351A and 351B, respectively.

(5) Projected Member Moving Mechanism The projected member moving mechanism 305 includes support plates 351A and 351B, a pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352, and a flat screen member moving mechanism 353, as shown in FIGS. .

  Each of the support plates 351A and 351B is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member having a vertically long surface, and the support plates 351A and 351B are disposed at an appropriate distance (trapezoid) in the left-right direction (the long side direction of the pseudo reel member 303). The gap is larger than the width of the member 302). The support plates 351A and 351B are fixed to the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311 of the storage case 301 using fixing members such as screws. The pseudo reel member 303 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the support plate 351B.

  Further, the support plates 351A and 351B rotatably support the rotating arms 332A and 332B of the pseudo reel member 303, respectively. The support plates 351A and 351B have a through hole through which a shaft 374 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 described later penetrates, and a through hole through which the pivot shaft 335 of the pivot arms 332A and 332B in the pseudo reel member 303 penetrate. Is provided.

  Further, a stopper 355, a first sensor 356, and a second sensor 357 are provided on the support plate 351B. The stopper 355 is a member for limiting a rotation range of a drive gear 362 described later of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352. The first sensor 356 detects a later-described crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the standby position. The second sensor 357 detects a later-described crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the exposure position.

  The pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 includes a drive motor 361 and a drive gear 362. The drive motor 361 is fixed to the motor fixing portion 314b of the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 361 is attached to the right side wall 314 such that a rotation shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 361 meshes with the drive gear 362.

  The drive gear 362 is formed of a gear member having a substantially semicircular surface, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The drive gear 362 is disposed on a surface of the support plate 351B facing the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. Further, a rotation shaft 335 of a rotation arm 332B (see FIG. 11 described later) of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to a center portion of the drive gear 362.

  The flat screen member moving mechanism 353 includes a drive motor 371, intermediate gears 372 and 373, a shaft 374, crank gears 375 and 376, and crank arms 378A and 378B. The drive motor 371 is fixed to the support plate 351B using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 371 is attached to the support plate 351B such that the rotation shaft 371a of the drive motor 371 meshes with the intermediate gear 372.

  The intermediate gear 372 is disposed between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. One end of a shaft 374 that protrudes through a through hole 314a (see FIG. 8) provided in the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 is connected to the center of the intermediate gear 372.

  The intermediate gear 373 is disposed between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The other end of the shaft 374 protruding through a through hole 313a (see FIG. 8) provided in the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301 is connected to the center of the intermediate gear 373.

  The shaft 374 is provided through the support plates 351A and 351B, and rotatably supports the support plates 351A and 351B. Since the intermediate gear 373 is connected to the intermediate gear 372 via the shaft 374 as described above, the intermediate gear 373 rotates together with the intermediate gear 372.

  The crank gear 375 is disposed between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the right side wall 314. At this time, the crank gear 375 is arranged to mesh with the intermediate gear 372. A crank pin 375a is formed on a surface of the intermediate gear 372 facing the support plate 351B.

  The crank gear 376 is disposed between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the left side wall 313. At this time, the crank gear 376 is arranged so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 373. A crank pin 376a is formed on a surface of the intermediate gear 373 facing the support plate 351A.

  The crank arm 378A is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351A. The crank arm 378A has an arm portion 381 formed of a plate-like member extending substantially in an L shape, and a connection portion 382 provided at one end of the arm portion 381.

  The arm portion 381 is provided with a rotation shaft 384 rotatably engaged with the support plate 351A and an engagement groove 385 extending linearly. The engagement groove 385 is provided on a surface of the arm portion 381 facing the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 385.

  The connection portion 382 is formed of a rectangular plate-shaped member. One surface of the connection portion 382 is continuous with the arm portion 381, and the other surface (flat surface) is in contact with the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 382 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The crank arm 378B is disposed between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The crank arm 378B has an arm portion 391 formed of a plate-like member extending in a substantially L-shape, and a connection portion 392 provided at one end of the arm portion 391.

  The arm portion 391 includes a rotation shaft (not shown) rotatably engaged with the support plate 351A, an engagement groove 395 extending linearly, a first detection piece 396, and a second detection piece 397. Is provided. The engagement groove 395 is provided on a surface of the arm portion 391 facing the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. The crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 395.

  The first detection piece 396 is provided at a position between the connection portion 392 and the engagement groove 395, and protrudes outward from one side (the back side in FIG. 9) of the arm portion 391. When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the standby position, the first detection piece 396 is detected by the first sensor 356 provided on the support plate 351B.

  The second detection piece 397 is provided below the first detection piece 396, and protrudes outward from one side of the arm 391. When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the second detection piece 397 is detected by the second sensor 357 provided on the support plate 351B.

  The connection portion 392 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connection portion 392 is continuous with the arm portion 391, and the other surface (flat surface) is in contact with the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 392 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 using a fixing member such as a screw.

[State when using trapezoid members]
Next, a state in which the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the projection target block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of the image light.

  In a state where the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of the image light, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are arranged at the respective standby positions.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is located at the standby position, the pseudo reel member 303 is located behind the trapezoid member 302, and the inner peripheral surface 331a of the arcuate plate 331 faces forward. At this time, one radial portion (one radial side portion) of the drive gear 362 contacts the stopper 355 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, when the projection block 202 is viewed from the right side (the right wall 314 side), the rotation of the drive gear 362 clockwise (clockwise) is locked by the stopper 355.

  When the flat screen member 304 is located at the standby position, the flat screen member 304 is located above the trapezoidal member 302, and the first flat surface 304a faces downward. At this time, the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 provided on the crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 150 detects that the flat screen member 304 is located at the standby position.

  The pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 (projected member) arranged at the standby position do not intervene between the trapezoidal member 302 and the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, in this state, the trapezoidal member 302 is exposed from the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is a projection target of image light.

  The projection light 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a (see FIG. 8 for the projection surface 324a) of the trapezoidal member 302 to be projected is projected with the image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237. Is done. Thereby, the image used for the effect is displayed on each projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 to be projected, and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, video light is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the floor plate portion 321 of the trapezoidal member 302 and the three wall plate portions 322, 323, 324 (see FIG. 8 for the wall plate portion 324). , Display the video used for the effect. This makes it possible to perform a novel effect in which a three-dimensional effect and depth can be felt in a video with a simple configuration without increasing the cost. As a result, the player's interest in the video display effect can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the trapezoidal member 302 applied as the projection target member has four projection surfaces that intersect at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light to be projected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, using a projected member having two or three projection surfaces intersecting at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light as the projected member according to the present invention. Alternatively, a projection member having five or more projection surfaces intersecting at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration example in which the trapezoid member 302 is fixed at a predetermined position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the trapezoidal member according to the present invention, for example, a trapezoidal member movable between a standby position where the image light emitted from the projector is not projected and an exposure position where the image light emitted from the projector is projected may be used. Good. In this case, the trapezoidal member may be moved in a mode in which the trapezoidal member is rotated about an appropriate axis, or in a straight line.

[Operation of pseudo reel member]
Next, the operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a state of the projection target block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 12 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of the image light.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of the image light, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposure position (the state shown in FIGS. 11 and 12). At this time, the flat screen member 304 is maintained in a state of being arranged at the standby position.

  To move the pseudo reel member 303 to the exposure position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the projection block 202 is viewed from the right side (the right wall 314 side) in the drawing, and the driving gear 362 is moved. Is rotated left (counterclockwise) (see the thick arrow in FIG. 11).

  Since the rotating shaft 335 provided on the rotating arm 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the driving gear 362, when the driving gear 362 is rotated counterclockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved leftward from the standby position. Rotate around. When the other radial portion of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355, the counterclockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the exposed position.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the exposed position, the front of the trapezoid member 302 is covered by the pseudo reel member 303. At this time, the flat screen member 304 disposed at the standby position does not intervene between the pseudo reel member 303 and the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, in this state, the pseudo reel member 303 is exposed from the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and becomes a projection target of image light.

  Image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the outer peripheral surface 331b (hereinafter, referred to as “projection surface 331b”) of the pseudo reel member 303 to be projected. Thereby, the video used for the effect is displayed on the pseudo reel member 303 as the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 from the exposure position to the standby position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven so that the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in FIG. Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

  When the drive gear 362 rotates clockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 rotates clockwise from the exposed position. Then, when one radial portion of the drive gear 362 contacts the stopper 355 (the state of FIG. 9), the clockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the standby position.

  In the present embodiment, video light representing a reel is projected on the curved projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Thereby, it can be seen that the reels physically exist in the cabinet 2a facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (the front door 2b). As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which a three-dimensional effect and depth are felt in the image with a simple configuration without increasing the cost, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the effect of displaying the image.

[Operation of flat screen member]
Next, the operation of the flat screen member 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state of the projection target block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 14 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light.

  When the flat screen member 304 is to be projected by the image light, the flat screen member 304 is moved from the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposure position (the state shown in FIGS. 13 and 14). At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 is maintained in a state where it is arranged at the standby position.

  To move the flat screen member 304 to the exposure position, the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the projection block 202 is viewed from the right side (the right wall 314 side) in the drawing, and the intermediate gear 372 is moved. Is rotated clockwise (see the thick arrow in FIG. 13).

  One end of a shaft 374 is connected to the intermediate gear 372, and an intermediate gear 373 (see FIG. 9) is connected to the other end of the shaft 374. Therefore, when the projection block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing and the intermediate gear 372 rotates clockwise, the intermediate gear 373 also rotates clockwise.

  When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate clockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise (see FIG. 9) when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing. The crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is engaged with the engagement groove 395 of the crank arm 378B, and the crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is engaged with the engagement groove 385 of the crank arm 378A.

  Therefore, when the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise), respectively. As a result, the planar screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates counterclockwise from the standby position when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing.

  Then, when the second sensor 357 detects the second detection piece 397 of the crank arm 378B, the driving of the drive motor 371 stops, and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 stops. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the flat screen member 304 is located at the exposed position.

  When the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the exposed position, the front of the trapezoid member 302 is covered by the flat screen member 304. At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 arranged at the standby position does not intervene between the flat screen member 304 and the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the flat screen member 304 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and becomes a projection target.

  The image light that has entered from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 to be projected. Thereby, the video used for the effect is displayed on the flat screen member 304 to be projected, and can be visually recognized by the player. For example, by projecting image light representing a two-dimensional image on a projection surface 304b which is a plane of the flat screen member 304, the same as when an image is displayed on a display device using a flat panel such as a liquid crystal display device. The video can be shown to the player.

  To move the flat screen member 304 from the exposure position to the standby position, the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing, and the intermediate gear 372, Rotate 373 counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate counterclockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate clockwise when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing. When the crank gears 375 and 376 rotate clockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B to rotate clockwise, respectively. As a result, the planar screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates clockwise from the exposed position when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing.

  Thereafter, when the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 of the crank arm 378B, the driving of the drive motor 371 stops, and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 stops. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the standby position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a white paint is applied to the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. Then, image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface 304 b of the flat screen member 304. White and silver (gray) have at least approximately constant reflectance of visible light, and white has higher reflectance of light than silver. Therefore, the two-dimensional image projected on the white projection surface 304b can be made more visible than, for example, the two-dimensional image projected on the projection surface 304b coated with silver paint.

  On the other hand, silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Therefore, the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303 produce a three-dimensional image more than the case where a white paint is applied to these projection surfaces. It can be made to look three-dimensional.

<Control system of pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of the pachislo 1.

  The pachislot 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachislot 1 has a reel relay terminal plate 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachislot 1 includes an external centralized terminal plate 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

  The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 (setting 1 to setting 6) or when confirming the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. It is. The external concentrated terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The power supply device 53 has a power supply board 53b and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed to supply necessary power to the pachislot 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44 and also to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61.

  The pachislot 1 has a door relay terminal plate 68, and a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, a sub relay board 61, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 402 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The BET switch 77 (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel, and a circuit for displaying the main reel that can be stopped by an LED or the like. Further, a stop switch (not shown) is provided on the stop switch substrate 80. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 6 (7-segment display) and the LED 82. The LEDs 82 are, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter, referred to as “first LEDs” to “1st LED” to “1”) that are lit in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter, referred to as “inserted number”). An LED for lighting a mark indicating that medals can be inserted, a mark indicating a game start, a mark for performing a re-game, and the like based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81) And so on. In the first to third LEDs (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED is turned on, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs are turned on, and three medals (game When the (startable number) is inserted, the first to third LEDs are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Both the first interface board 401 for the testing machine and the second interface board 402 for the testing machine are relay boards used for outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the pachislot 1 verification test (test shooting test) ( Note that these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, so the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 401 for test machine and the test machine. Various electronic components necessary for connection to the second interface board 402 are not mounted.) For example, a test signal for controlling main operations related to the game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, and the like) is output through the first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and is determined by the main control board 71, for example. A test signal related to the pushed order navigation is output via the second interface board for tester 402.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the sub relay board 61. The pachislot 1 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61, the speaker group 84, the LED group 85, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63, the touch sensor 19, and the projection member moving mechanism 305 (display unit). ). Since the touch sensor 19 and the projection member moving mechanism 305 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The speaker group 84 includes various speakers such as an upper left speaker 64L, an upper right speaker 64R, a lower left speaker 65L, and a lower right speaker 65R. The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10 and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores history information of opening / closing of the middle door 41. When the middle door 41 is opened, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 150).

  Further, the pachislot 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a display device relay substrate 87 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the display device relay board 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 151, and images (videos), sounds (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data for effects. . The ROM cartridge substrate 86 shows a specific example of the nonvolatile storage unit (storage unit) according to the present invention.

  The display device relay board 87 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector 213 included in the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachislo 1.

  The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, and a switching regulator 94 (power supply means).

  The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for gaming machines. In the microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment, various instruction codes (instruction codes dedicated to the main CPU 101) specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be defined in a source program are provided. In the present embodiment, by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101, the processing efficiency and the program capacity are reduced. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The clock pulse generating circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

  The power supply management circuit 93 manages the fluctuation of the power supply voltage of DC 12V supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 15). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the “XSRST” terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10 V) from 0 V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5 V) from 12 V), a power failure detection signal is output to the “XINT” terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal (start signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and outputs a power cut detection signal (power cut signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power cut occurs. (Power failure means).

  The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC driving voltage (power supply voltage of 5 V DC) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC driving voltage to a “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Microprocessor>
Next, an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

  The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, It has a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. These components constituting the microprocessor 91 are connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

  The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105, and controls the entire game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

  After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel). Accordingly, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Each time a pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses required for rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 150, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  The external bus interface 104 is used to electrically connect the microprocessor 91 to an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, respective reels) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. An interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 includes, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and the like. The clock circuit 105 receives the CPU operation clock pulse signal input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 and outputs the clock signal to another component (for example, the timer circuit 113). It is converted into a clock pulse signal of the frequency to be used. Note that the clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

  The reset controller 106 resets an IAT (Illegal Address Trap) or a WDT (watchdog timer) based on a reset signal input from the power management circuit 93. The operation circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a multiplication instruction (“MUL” instruction) on the source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on this instruction.

  The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 stores a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte soft latch random number. It comprises random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) for signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, the power management circuit 93) provided outside the microprocessor 91. . The parallel port 111 is also connected to a random number circuit 110 and an interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to one of the input ports PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and the latch signal is sent from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing when the start switch 79 is turned on (on edge). Is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is obtained.

  The interrupt controller 112 performs an interrupt process by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a time-out signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a period of 1.1172 ms. Control the execution timing. When a power interruption detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93 or a time-out signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to The main CPU 101 performs an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, a timer, based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Various interrupt processing such as update processing is performed.

  The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates on a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)) ( Count elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a period of 1.1172 msec.

  The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when transmitting data (various control commands (commands)) from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit for controlling a serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 402 for a tester.

  <Sub-control circuit>

[Configuration of sub-control circuit]
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 150 (sub control means) mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 150 of the pachislo 1.

  The sub-control circuit 150 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 150 basically includes a sub CPU 151, a sub RAM 152, a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 153, a VRAM (Video RAM) 154, a driver 155, a sound chip 157, and a digital amplifier 158. The VRAM 154 (rendering RAM) includes a frame buffer and a screen buffer described later. The sub CPU 151 is a specific example of a control processing unit according to the present invention, the GPU 153 is a specific example of an image processing unit according to the present invention, and the VRAM 154 is a volatile storage unit. 1 shows a specific example.

  The sub CPU 151 is connected to the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Further, the driver 155 is connected to the display device relay board 87. That is, the driver 155 is connected to the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 via the display device relay board 87.

  The sub CPU 151 controls output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in response to a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 151 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and an effect registration for extracting random number values for effect, determining and registering effect contents (effect data). Various programs for executing tasks are included. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling display of an image on the display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound from the speaker group 84. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of the program are also included.

  In the data storage area, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and animation data (including image data and virtual object data to be described later) related to video creation are stored. Storage area. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub RAM 152 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

  The sub CPU 151, the GPU 153 (rendering processor), the VRAM 154, and the driver 155 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created video on the display device 11 (the projector 213) and / or the sub display device 18. . The display device 11 (projector 213) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

  In addition, the sub CPU 151 cooperates with the sound chip 157 and the digital amplifier 158 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the content of the effect, via the sound chip 157 and the digital amplifier 158. Output. Further, the sub CPU 151 controls turning on and off of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

[Direction registration task]
In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 150 receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the sub-control circuit 150 responds to the type of the command data based on the received command data. The effect to be performed is determined, and the display device 11 (projector 213), the sub-display device 18, the speaker group 84, and the LED group 85 are driven to perform the effect control.

  Here, the effect determination task (effect registration task) corresponding to the type of command data, which is executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating the processing procedure of the effect registration task in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 151 takes out a message from the message queue (S1). Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S2). In S2, when the sub CPU 151 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S2 is NO), the sub CPU 151 performs the process of S5 described later.

  On the other hand, in S2, when the sub CPU 151 determines that there is a message in the message queue (YES in S2), the sub CPU 151 copies game information from the message (S3). In this process, for example, various data such as information on the internal winning combination (main lottery flag and the like) specified by the parameter, the type of the reel stopped rotating, the display combination, and the game state flag are stored in the sub RAM 152. Copied to an area (not shown).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 performs an effect content determination process (S4). In this process, the sub CPU 151 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command.

  After the processing of S4 or when the determination of S2 is NO, the sub CPU 151 performs the generation and registration processing of the animation data (S5). Note that the generation and registration processing of the animation data is performed based on the effect data (effect contents) registered in the effect content determination process in S4. In the present embodiment, in this process, a process of creating image data of video light projected onto various projection target members is performed. The process of creating image data of image light (PJ-compatible image data to be described later) projected onto various projection target members will be described later in detail. Further, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which image data (a video signal corresponding to the video light emitted from the projector 213) of the video light projected onto various projection members during the processing of S5 is described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, the invention may be executed in the effect content determination processing in S4, or the animation data generation processing and the registration processing may be performed separately.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 performs sound data registration processing (S6). Next, the sub CPU 151 registers the lamp data (S7). Note that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data (effect contents) registered in the effect content determination process of S4. Then, after the processing in S7, the sub CPU 151 returns the processing to S1, and repeats the processing from S1.

<Image data creation method>
Next, in various effects performed by the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, image data (projector) of video light projected on the projection surface of various projection target members (trapezoid member 302, pseudo reel member 303, and flat screen member 304). A method for creating a video signal corresponding to the video light emitted from the 213 will be described.

[Overview of Image Data Creation Method]
With reference to FIGS. 20A and 20B, an outline of a method for creating image data of video light projected on various projection target members will be described. FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a process of converting image data in the process of creating image data, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a flow of main processing executed in the process of converting image data.

  According to the method of creating image data (PJ-compatible image data to be described later) of video light projected onto various projection members in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20B, resource image / object combining processing, viewpoint change image data acquisition The setting process and the SB image data setting process are executed in this order. Hereinafter, the contents of each process will be described.

(1) Resource Image / Object Synthesizing Process In the resource image / object synthesizing process, first, the projection target (the trapezoid member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to be projected. Virtual object data (three-dimensional data) is selected (acquired). The virtual object data is, for example, data generated (converted) from the three-dimensional CAD data of the member to be projected, and is data indicating the three-dimensional structure (coordinates) of the member to be projected. The virtual object data indicates a specific example of information for displaying an image on the display unit according to the present invention.

  Further, in the resource image / object synthesizing process, resource image data (two-dimensional data) of image data to be projected on the projection target member is selected (acquired) from the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Note that the resource image data is a specific example of the original image data according to the present invention.

  The selection processing of the virtual object data and the resource image data is controlled by the sub CPU 151, and the sub CPU 151 is determined from the plurality of types of image data and the plurality of types of virtual object data stored in the ROM cartridge 86. The resource image data and the virtual object data corresponding to the effect contents are selected. Further, the selected resource image data and virtual object data are developed in the VRAM 154 in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than a frame buffer (FB) and a screen buffer (SB) described later. Note that the virtual buffer is a specific example of the first buffer according to the present invention, and the frame buffer is a specific example of the second buffer (predetermined buffer) according to the present invention. The screen buffer is a specific example of the third buffer (specific buffer) according to the present invention.

  Next, the selected virtual object is arranged in the virtual space (VRAM 154) in the arithmetic processing on the sub side. Specifically, the selected virtual object data is developed on the VRAM 154. Next, in the virtual space, a direction from the player side to the virtual object (hereinafter, referred to as “the player's eye direction”): In an actual gaming machine, the display device cover 30 and the display device 11 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) ), The video light of the selected resource image data is virtually (pseudo) illuminated (projected) on the projection surface of the virtual object in the direction from the position on the player side opposite to the virtual object). Image data (hereinafter, referred to as “virtual projected image data”) of an image projected (projected) on a surface is calculated (generated) by arithmetic processing. The virtual projection image data is generated by the GPU 153 performing three-dimensional CG processing (including three-dimensional coordinate calculation and the like) on the virtual object data and the resource image data to combine the two data. This combining operation can be executed using an algorithm used in conventional three-dimensional image programming or the like. The virtual projection image data indicates a specific example of data of the first viewpoint image (predetermined viewpoint image) according to the present invention, and the line of sight of the player is the first direction according to the present invention. It shows a specific example of (predetermined direction).

  A series of processes from the above-described process of acquiring (developing) virtual object data and resource image data to the process of synthesizing both data (process of generating virtual projection image data) is a resource image / object combining process shown in FIG. This processing is performed by the GPU 153 based on a command from the sub CPU 151. This resource image / object synthesis processing is performed on the VRAM 154.

  When the GPU 153 combines virtual object data having three-dimensional space coordinates and resource image data having two-dimensional space coordinates, the two-dimensional coordinates of the resource image data are converted into three-dimensional coordinates. In this conversion processing, for example, All the coordinates of the resource image data may be sequentially subjected to the coordinate conversion process, or the coordinates of a predetermined reference number (for example, half of the total number of coordinates) of the total number of coordinates may be used. Conversion processing may be performed. In the case of adopting the latter method, for example, a coordinate conversion process is performed on coordinates arranged at predetermined intervals sandwiching one or more coordinates. Then, the values of the coordinates located between the coordinates subjected to the coordinate conversion processing are calculated by processing such as linear interpolation. When the latter method is adopted, it is desirable to set the reference number of conversion (the number of coordinates) to a number (the amount of conversion) according to the processing performance of the GPU 153. Note that the processing performance of the GPU 153 is determined according to the processing speed of the GPU 153 and the number of cores included in the GPU 153 (the number of cores of a general GPU is about 64 to 2048), and the processing performance of the GPU 153 is low. In this case, the reference number (coordinates) of the conversion is reduced, and when the processing performance of the GPU 153 is sufficiently low, the reference number (coordinates) of the conversion is increased.

  As described above, in the process of generating virtual projection image data (the process of synthesizing resource image data and virtual object data) according to the present embodiment, a two-dimensional predetermined number (the total number of coordinates or a predetermined reference number) in the resource image is used. Since the coordinates are directly converted into three-dimensional coordinates by three-dimensional CG processing, for example, each boundary portion between the four projection surfaces 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p (for example, the lower side portion of the projection surface 322p) And the boundary between the image and the upper side of the projection surface 321p) can be minimized.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which virtual object data and resource image data are selected and obtained from the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and the obtained data is combined on the VRAM 154. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, first, a plurality of types of virtual object data and a plurality of types of resource image data are loaded (read) from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to an area other than the above-described virtual buffer, frame buffer, and screen buffer on the VRAM 154. Then, from the loaded plural kinds of virtual object data and plural kinds of resource image data, predetermined virtual object data and predetermined resource image data are selected, and then both selected data are compared with the present embodiment. Similarly, it may be developed into a virtual buffer, a frame buffer, and a screen buffer and synthesized. In this case, of the plurality of types of resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, only a plurality of resource image data belonging to a corresponding effect group are loaded based on, for example, a game state or an effect state. You may.

(2) Viewpoint Change Image Data Acquisition / Setting Process In the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process, first, the image light (projection light) of the resource image data from the direction of the player's line of sight to the projection plane of the virtual object in the virtual space. ) Is virtually projected (state in which virtual projection image data is generated), the incident direction of the image light actually incident on the projection surface of the projection target member (hereinafter referred to as the “actual incident direction of the image light”). ), Image data (hereinafter, referred to as “virtual photographed image data”) when a virtual projection image projected on the projection plane of the virtual object is photographed virtually (pseudo) is generated by arithmetic processing. That is, in a state where the video light of the resource image data is virtually projected from the direction of the player's eyes onto the projection plane of the virtual object, the viewpoint is changed and the data of the image virtually projected on the projection plane of the virtual object is changed. calculate. The virtual captured image data indicates a specific example of the data of the second viewpoint image according to the present invention, and the actual incident direction of the video light is a specific example of the second direction according to the present invention. It shows.

  In the virtual photographing process, first, the incident direction of the actual image light on the virtual object in the virtual space is set (set). In the present embodiment, as the actual incident direction of the image light, the incident direction of the image light incident on the projection surface of the projection target member from the projector 213 via the reflection mirror 237, that is, the projection direction of the projection target member from the reflection mirror 237 The direction toward the surface is set.

  Next, the virtual projection image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is converted into the actual video light by the three-dimensional CG processing (including the coordinate calculation from the incident direction of the actual video light (the position of the virtual camera)) of the GPU 153. Is converted into a virtual captured image obtained when the image is virtually captured from the incident direction side (the virtual projected image data developed on the VRAM 154 is converted into virtual captured image data). The process of generating the virtual captured image data (the process of converting the virtual projected image data to the virtual captured image data) can be executed using an algorithm used in conventional three-dimensional image programming or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described viewpoint change processing when generating virtual captured image data and generation processing of virtual captured image data are performed in viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting processing illustrated in FIG. 20B. The processing is executed by the GPU 153 based on a command from the CPU 151. This viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting processing is performed on the VRAM 154.

  Here, FIG. 21 shows a state in which the image light of the resource image is virtually projected from the direction of the player's line of sight to the projection plane of the virtual object of the projected member in the virtual space, and the actual image light. 5 shows a state in which a virtual projection image projected on a projection surface of a virtual object is virtually photographed from the incident direction. FIG. 22 shows a specific example of the virtual projection image generated by the virtual projection operation of the resource image in the virtual space. FIGS. 21 and 22 show an example in which the projection target member to which the image light is projected is the trapezoidal member 302.

  When the image light of the resource image data is virtually projected onto the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 arranged in the virtual space from the direction of the player's eyes (the direction of arrow A2 in FIG. 21), as shown in FIG. A resource image is virtually projected on each of the four projection planes 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p, and a virtual projection image is generated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, the resource image is converted into a three-dimensional image (virtual projection image) having a depth reflecting the shape of the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302. This virtual projected image is an image similar to an actual image visually recognized when the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is viewed from the player side in the real space. At this time, if the projection target of the image light is the trapezoidal member 302 or the pseudo reel member 303, the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape, so that a three-dimensional virtual projection image with depth is obtained. However, when the projection target of the image light is the flat screen member 304, a planar virtual projection image is obtained.

  Then, in a state where the resource image is virtually projected on each of the four projection surfaces 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302, the actual incident direction of the video light (arrow A1 in FIG. 21). Direction), when the virtual projection image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is virtually photographed, the virtual projection image is converted into a virtual photographed image from the direction of arrow A1.

  When the image light (projection light) corresponding to the virtual photographed image generated as described above is actually projected from the projector 213 to the projection surface of the projection target member via the reflection mirror 237, the actual image light is incident. When the projection surface of the projection target member is viewed from the direction (the side of the reflection mirror 237), the image projected on the projection surface becomes an image similar to the virtual photographed image generated in the virtual space. Then, in this situation, the actual image seen when viewing the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 from the player side is an image similar to the virtual projection image generated in the virtual space. That is, when the image light (projection light) corresponding to the virtual photographed image data is actually projected from the projector 213 onto the projection surface of the projection target member via the reflection mirror 237, the projection side of the projection target member is viewed from the player side. A projection image (three-dimensional image with depth) similar to the virtual projection image in which the shape of is reflected can be seen.

  In the present embodiment, in the above-described series of image data conversion processing from the resource image data to the virtual photographed image data, not the image data corresponding to the size of the projection surface of the projection target (screen size) but the projection target Is used as the image data to be processed.

  Specifically, as image data to be processed, an image obtained by adding dummy image data of the same size as the size of the projection surface to the upper end of the image data of the image (projection target image) projected on the projection surface of the projection target member Data (image data whose size in the height (vertical) direction of the image in the virtual space is twice that of the projection target image) is used. That is, image data to be processed in a series of image data conversion processing from the above-described resource image data to virtual photographed image data is performed when the projection angle of view (viewing angle) in the height direction of video light is doubled. Size image data (hereinafter also referred to as “double view angle data”). Therefore, for example, when the size of the screen (projection plane) (image size to be projected) is 1280 pixels (horizontal) × 800 pixels (vertical), the size of the image data to be processed (double field angle data) The size is 1280 pixels (horizontal) × 1600 pixels (vertical).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 is configured in advance with double angle-of-view data. Therefore, at the time of reading out the resource image data in the resource image / object synthesizing process, the mode of the image data to be processed is the double view angle data. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 is assumed to be image data (screen (projection plane) size image data) including only the image to be projected, and the resource image / object synthesis is performed. In the processing, the double image angle data may be generated by adding dummy image data to the read resource image data.

  In the present embodiment, the reason why the double field angle data having the above-described configuration is used as the image data to be processed is as follows. Normally, when the light emitted from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member, an image distortion occurs at the center of the upper end or lower end of the image projected on the projection surface due to the optical characteristics of the projector 213. This is because a projection lens is designed in advance in a general projector on the assumption that image light is projected on a screen at an irregular angle (a trapezoidal angle of view in which short and long sides exist). It is. The position where the image distortion occurs (the center of the upper end or lower end of the image) may be determined, for example, by the mounting mode of the projector 213 in the housing (the upper (ceiling) surface of the projector 213 is mounted upward or downward). (Upside down) or the area of use of the projection lens (upper half or lower half). In the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the projection block 201 is configured so that image distortion occurs at the center of the upper end of the image projected on the projection surface.

  Further, the resource image data is generally generated as data for a liquid crystal display device in many cases, and also in the present embodiment, the resource image data is generated as data for a liquid crystal display device. Then, in the liquid crystal display device, the image distortion occurs at the center position on the screen, so the GPU 153 (or VDP) performs processing for suppressing (correcting) the distortion at the center of the image on the resource image data.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the double object angle data in which a dummy image is provided above an image (projection target image) to be subjected to virtual projection and virtual shooting is used as processing target data of the GPU 153, The GPU 153 performs processing for suppressing (correcting) image distortion at the center of the image of the double angle of view data. In this case, since the center of the image of the double angle-of-view data is the center on the boundary between the dummy image and the projection target image, distortion of the image at the center position of the upper end of the projection target image is suppressed (corrected). . As a result, the image at the position where the image distortion occurs when the image is actually projected on the projection surface of the projection target member by the projector 213 is corrected. In the present embodiment, the image distortion correction processing is performed on the double field angle data expanded (stored) in the frame buffer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An image distortion correction process may be performed on the expanded double field angle data.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by using the double view angle data having the above-described configuration as the processing target data of the GPU 153, the distortion of the image in the resource image data (double view angle data) generated for the liquid crystal display device is obtained. Is adjusted so that the occurrence position (center of the double angle of view data) and the position of the distortion (center of the upper end of the projection target image) generated in the image actually projected by the projector 213 coincide with each other. As a result, in the stage of the process of generating the PJ-compatible image data, it is possible to suppress (correct) the image distortion that occurs when the projector 213 actually projects the image on the projection surface of the projection target member. Thus, a high-quality effect image can be provided to the player.

  Note that, for example, in the case where data for a projector (image data in which distortion occurs at the center of the upper end or lower end of an image) is prepared in advance as resource image data, a series of data from the resource image data to the virtual captured image data is prepared. In the image data conversion processing described above, the same-magnification angle-of-view data without a dummy image may be used as processing target data. In this case, the GPU 153 performs processing for suppressing (correcting) image distortion at the center of the upper end or lower end of the image of the same-magnification view angle data.

  20B is set in the frame buffer (FB) provided in the VRAM 154 (rendering RAM), and the setting process is performed by the GPU 153 (FIG. 20B). Rendering processor). As described above, since the image data set in the frame buffer (FB) is double view angle data (virtual photographed image data + dummy image data), the image data set in the VRAM 154 is stored in the frame buffer (FB). The size (the size of the storage area of the virtual captured image data) is also twice as large as the size of the projection surface of the projection target member (screen size).

(3) SB image data setting process In the SB image data setting process, the image data of the projection target image out of the double view angle data (virtual image data + dummy image data) set in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 That is, only the virtual photographed image data is transferred to the screen buffer (SB) provided in the VRAM 154. Specifically, the image data in the area where the virtual captured image data is stored in the storage area of the frame buffer is copied to the screen buffer (the dummy image data is not transferred to the screen buffer).

  As a result, image data (hereinafter, referred to as “PJ-compatible image data”) of video light actually projected on the projection surface of the projection target member is generated, and the PJ-compatible image data is stored in the screen buffer of the VRAM 154. The processing for generating the PJ-compatible image data (the processing of transferring the virtual captured image data to the screen buffer) is controlled by the GPU 153. Further, since the PJ-compatible image data has half the size of the image data to be processed, the size of the screen buffer of the VRAM 154 in which the PJ-compatible image data is set can be set to half the size of the frame buffer. it can.

  Here, FIG. 23 shows an outline of the SB image data setting process. When the virtual captured image data is set in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 in the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting processing shown in FIG. 20B, the dummy is placed in the upper half area of the frame buffer (FB) on the surface of FIG. Image data is stored, and virtual captured image data is stored in a lower half area. Next, when the SB image data setting process in FIG. 20B is performed, only the data of the area in the frame buffer where the virtual captured image data is stored is transferred (copied) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154, and The transferred image data is set as PJ-compatible image data.

  After that, the PJ-compatible image data set in the screen buffer includes a video signal (for example, “V-by-one (registered trademark)”, “Display Port (registered trademark)”, “LVDS”, “Clockless Link (registered trademark)”. ) ", A video signal having an interface specification such as an analog RGB component video signal), and the video signal is output to the projector 213. Then, the projector 213 emits video light corresponding to the PJ-compatible image data based on the input video signal. In the present embodiment, as described above, image data (PJ-compatible image data) of video light actually projected on the projection surface of the projection target member is generated. Hereinafter, the method of generating the PJ-compatible image data (and the video signal thereof) according to the present embodiment is referred to as a “virtual projection imaging method”.

[Overview of PJ-Compatible Image Data Generation When Projected Member is Moving]
In FIGS. 21 to 23, as an example of generating the PJ-compatible image data, an example has been described in which the projection member to be projected with the video light is only the trapezoidal member 302 (single movable target member). The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-described method of generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection photography method can be applied to, for example, a case where video light is projected in an effect of a process of switching a projection target member to be projected.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 24A to 24E, an outline of generation of PJ-compatible image data in the process of switching the projection target member to be projected from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 will be described. 24A to 24E illustrate a virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and a virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 that are arranged in the virtual space in the process of switching the projection target member to be projected from the trapezoid member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a temporal change (time-series change) of a positional relationship between the two.

  24A to 24E, in order to clarify the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 is simplified. Specifically, the size of the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 is shown smaller than the actual size (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  FIG. 24A shows a position where after the switching from the trapezoid member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 is started (after the driving of the pseudo reel member 303 is started), the pseudo reel member 303 starts to be seen above the trapezoid member 302 when viewed from the player side. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between a virtual object 302p of a trapezoidal member 302 and a virtual object 303p of a pseudo reel member 303 when the virtual object 302p has moved to a position. FIG. 24B is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the upper part of the trapezoid member 302. FIG. 24C is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 has moved to the vicinity of the upper front part of the trapezoidal member 302. FIG. 24D is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 starts moving to the front of the trapezoid member 302. FIG. 24E shows a state in which the pseudo reel member 303 has moved to a position covering the front surface (projection surface) of the trapezoidal member 302, and the switching operation of the projection target member from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 has been completed. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a virtual object 302p of a trapezoid member 302 and a virtual object 303p of a pseudo reel member 303.

  As described above, when the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projected member) moves to the front of the trapezoidal member 302, first, the pseudo reel member that has moved to the corresponding position at a predetermined interval timing (per time series). The virtual object data (hereinafter, referred to as “synthesized virtual object data”) of a virtual object (hereinafter, referred to as “synthesized virtual object”) obtained by synthesizing the virtual object 303p of 303 and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 is acquired. For example, in each of FIGS. 24A to 24E, combined virtual object data of the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 in operation and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 that has moved to the corresponding position is acquired.

  The control method for moving the virtual object 303p to the corresponding position in the virtual space is as follows. First, a frame generated based on pulse output data (not shown) of the drive motor 361 driven when the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the state of FIG. 24A to the state of FIG. 24E, and for displaying an image. Time series data (hereinafter, “movement angle data”) of the movement angle of the pseudo reel member 303 corresponding to the rate (30 fps in the present embodiment) is acquired. Next, the virtual object 303p is moved to a corresponding position at every predetermined timing (for example, every frame) by three-dimensional CG processing (including three-dimensional coordinate calculation and the like) of the GPU 153 using the acquired movement angle data. Then, data (virtual object data) of the moved virtual object 303p is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the movement angle data for each predetermined timing (for example, for each frame) acquired when the movable projection member is operating is prepared in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, data (virtual object data) of the virtual object 303p moved to a corresponding position at predetermined intervals of timing is generated in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. At each predetermined interval, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 that have moved to the corresponding position may be synthesized to generate synthesized virtual object data. Further, for example, synthetic virtual object data may be generated in advance at predetermined intervals and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and the corresponding synthetic virtual object data may be read and used at predetermined intervals. The predetermined interval at which the synthesized virtual object data is obtained can be arbitrarily set according to, for example, the frame rate of a video (moving image), the content of a video display effect, and the like.

  Next, video light of resource image data (double field angle data including a dummy image) is virtually projected from the player's line of sight (the direction of arrow A2 in FIG. 21) onto the synthesized virtual object arranged in the virtual space. Then, a virtual projection image is generated by synthesizing the resource image and the synthesized virtual object. Then, in a state where the resource image is virtually projected on the projection plane of the composite virtual object, the virtual image projected on the projection plane of the composite virtual object from the incident direction of the actual video light (the direction of the arrow A1 in FIG. 21). A projected image is virtually photographed, and virtual photographed image data (double-angle data including a dummy image) is obtained.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the projection target member to be projected is switched from the trapezoid member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projection member) and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 The processing other than generating the synthetic virtual object data at every predetermined interval timing is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. This is the same as the processing when only the projection target member).

  Here, an example has been described in which, when the projection target member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303, a method of generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method is applied. It is not limited to. For example, even when the projection target member to be projected is switched from the trapezoid member 302 to the flat screen member 304, by using the synthesized virtual object data of the flat screen member 304 and the trapezoid member 302 generated at predetermined intervals of timing, In addition, the method of generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method described above can be applied as it is. Also, for example, when performing an image display effect linked using a movable projection member and a non-movable projection member, the movable projection member and the non-movable projection member generated at predetermined time intervals are also used. By using the synthesized virtual object data, the method of generating the PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method described above can be applied as it is. Furthermore, for example, even in a gaming machine having a function of executing an interlocked video display effect using three or more projected members, by using composite virtual object data of three or more projected members, The method of generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method described above can be applied as it is.

[Procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data]
Next, referring to FIG. 25, a process of generating PJ-compatible image data (a series of processes from a resource image / object synthesis process to a video signal output process) by the virtual projection imaging method, which is performed in sub-control circuit 150, will be described. A specific processing procedure will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process of generating PJ-compatible image data and a video signal corresponding thereto according to the virtual projection imaging method.

  First, the sub CPU 151 selects resource image data to be displayed this time from various resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (S11). The image data selected in the processing of S11 is double angle-of-view data in which a dummy image having the same size as the resource image is added to the upper end of the resource image. In this process, the GPU 153 (rendering processor 153) develops the selected resource image data (double-angle data) into the VRAM 154 (rendering RAM) based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 selects the virtual object data of the projection target to be projected this time from the various virtual object data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (S12). In this process, when the projection target to be projected is one projection target, only the virtual object data of the projection target is selected. Also, in this processing, when there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected, the synthetic virtual object data corresponding to the current timing is selected. Then, in this process, the GPU 153 expands the selected virtual object data in the VRAM 154 based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  In the processing of S11 and S12, the selected resource image data and virtual object data are developed in the VRAM 154 in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer (FB) and the screen buffer (SB). The processing order of S11 and S12 is arbitrary, and the processing of S11 may be performed after the processing of S12.

  Next, the GPU 153 arranges the selected virtual object in the virtual space (VRAM 154), and, with respect to the projection plane of the virtual object, in the direction from the player to the virtual object (the direction of the player's eyes). The image light of the selected resource image data is virtually projected (irradiated) to generate (calculate) image data (virtual projected image data) of the virtual projected image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object (S13). In this process, the resource image data (double view angle data including the dummy image data) expanded on the VRAM 154 in S11 by the three-dimensional CG process (including the three-dimensional coordinate calculation and the like) of the GPU 153 is stored in the VRAM 154 in S12. Is combined with the virtual object data developed in the step (a) to generate (calculate) virtual projection image data (double view angle data including dummy image data).

  Next, in the virtual space, the GPU 153 changes the projection surface of the virtual object from the incident direction of the projection light (actual image light incidence direction) incident on the projection surface of the projection target member via the reflection mirror 237 from the projector 213. Then, virtual photographed image data (double view angle data including dummy image data) when virtually photographing the virtual projection image projected on the screen is generated (calculated) (S14). In this processing, the viewpoint change processing is performed by three-dimensional CG processing (including coordinate calculation and the like) of the GPU 153, and virtual photographed image data (double-view angle data including dummy image data) is generated (calculated).

  Next, the GPU 153 develops (sets) the virtual captured image data (double-angle data including the dummy image data) generated in S14 in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 (S15). Next, the GPU 153 converts the image data of the area in which the virtual captured image data is stored (in FIG. 23, the lower half area of the frame buffer) of the double angle of view data expanded in the frame buffer (FB). The data is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data (S16).

  Then, the GPU 153 converts the PJ-compatible image data copied to the screen buffer (SB) in S16 into a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the projector 213 (S17). In the present embodiment, PJ-compatible image data (video signal) to be output to the projector 213 is generated as described above.

[Various effects]
As described above, in the present embodiment, image data (virtual projection image) of an image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object when video light is virtually projected on the virtual object of the projection target member arranged in the virtual space. Using the data and the virtual captured image data), image data (PJ-compatible image data) of video light actually projected onto the projection target member is generated. Therefore, when the projector 213 actually projects the image light onto the projection target member, it is not necessary to perform a correction process for associating the projection image data with the shape of the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a high-quality, versatile video display effect utilizing the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in cost associated with CG creation.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the image data to be processed in the image data conversion processing from generation of the resource image data to generation of the virtual captured image data is the size of the projection surface of the projection target member (screen size). Is image data (double field angle data) obtained by adding a dummy image of the same size as the image to the upper part of the projection target image instead of the image data corresponding to. In this case, distortion occurs at the center of the upper end of the projection target image. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the stage of the PJ-compatible image data generation processing, the distortion of the center of the upper end of the projection target image is suppressed in advance ( Correction). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress distortion of an image actually projected on the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member, and to provide a high-quality rendered image to a player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if there are a plurality of projection members to which the image light is irradiated, the above-described virtual projection imaging method (the virtual projection processing of the image light and the virtual projection By applying the method of generating the PJ-compatible image data by the imaging process), it is possible to actually generate the image data of the video light to be projected on the projection target member. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when an image is projected on an object such as a three-dimensional object (three-dimensional screen) using a projector, it is possible to minimize the deviation of the projected image with respect to the object.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the plurality of projection target members include a movable projection target member (such as the pseudo reel member 303) and the movable projection target member is in operation, the composition is performed at predetermined intervals of timing. By applying the above-described method of generating the PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection photography method to the virtual object, it is possible to actually generate the image data to be projected on the projection target member. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, even if the configuration (number, shape, arrangement relationship) and interlocking properties of the projection target members become complicated, it is possible to easily perform high-quality and various video display effects. .

<Direction processing>
First, prior to the effect processing, the configuration relating to the sound effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 18 again.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a total of four speakers: an upper left speaker 64L, an upper right speaker 64R, a lower left speaker 65L, and a lower right speaker 65R. It is possible to output different sounds from the upper left speaker 64L, the upper right speaker 64R, the lower left speaker 65L, and the lower right speaker 65R. For example, when a navigation voice sound is output from the upper left speaker 64L, music can be output from the lower left speaker 65L. Note that it is also possible to output the same sound from the upper left speaker 64L, the upper right speaker 64R, the lower left speaker 65L, and the lower right speaker 65R.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the lower left speaker 65L and the lower right speaker 65R are configured to constantly output BGM, and repeatedly output a series of BGM continuous over a plurality of game periods by loop reproduction. . That is, when the reproduction of a series of BGMs is completed from the beginning to the end, the reproduction is performed again from the beginning. Further, when the effect sound output in units of one game different from the BGM is output over a plurality of continuous games, the effect sound is output from the lower left speaker 65L and the lower right speaker 65R. Is configured. On the other hand, when the effect sound output in one game unit different from the BGM is output only in one game, the effect sound is output from the upper left speaker 64L and the upper right speaker 64R. Have been. Further, a bet sound or the like output when a betting operation is performed is also output from the upper left speaker 64L and the upper right speaker 64R. The BGM output from the lower left speaker 65L and the lower right speaker 65R does not necessarily have to be music, but may be predetermined continuous sound effects.

  In the present embodiment, the sound data stored in the data storage area of the ROM cartridge substrate 86 shown in FIG. 18 includes sound data of music sound, sound data of navi voice sound, sound data of speech sound, and sound data of SE sound. Includes sound data. The sound data of the music sound is composed of the sound data of the vocal sound and the sound data of the accompaniment sound. The vocal sound is a sung voice, and the accompaniment sound is a performance sound of a musical instrument or the like.

  The dialogue sound is a voice containing the dialogue of the character displayed on the display device 11 in the effect of the game. The SE (Sound Effect) sound is an effect sound output as appropriate in the production of a game, and includes, for example, an effect sound output when a predetermined small winning combination or a predetermined internal winning combination is won. In the data storage area, sound data of a plurality of types of music sounds and sound data of speech sounds are stored.

[First Embodiment of Effect Processing]
Next, a first embodiment of the effect processing will be described.

  FIG. 26 is a hardware configuration diagram regarding sound production in the sub-control circuit 150, which is preferably used in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the sound chip 157 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 1571 and an audio RAM 1572.

  The sub CPU 151, the DSP 1571, the audio RAM 1572, and the digital amplifier 158 convert sound data designated by the effect contents into analog signals, and use the upper left speaker 64L, the upper right speaker 64R, the lower left speaker 65L, and the lower right speaker as sounds. Output to 65R. That is, the DSP 1571 is configured to amplify the sound data transferred from the sub CPU 151 via the digital amplifier 158, and then output the amplified sound data from the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound data table suitable for use in the present embodiment. The sound data table is a table that is referred to when realizing a sound effect corresponding to various effect contents. In FIG. 27, the notation “-” indicates a state in which the corresponding condition or the like is not defined.

  Using the sound data table shown in FIG. 27, the sub CPU 151 transfers the sound data associated with the command number (cmd No shown in FIG. 27) corresponding to the determined effect content from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571, Perform sound effects.

  As shown in FIG. 27, each command number includes the command content, the file name of the sound data stored in the ROM cartridge 86, each parameter related to each sound data, and the volume at the time of execution of each sound data. The reproduction start condition of each sound data, the switching condition of each sound data, and the interruption condition of each sound data are associated with each other.

  The file name is a file name of the sound data stored in the ROM cartridge 86. When executing each sound effect, the sub CPU 151 transfers the sound data of the file name associated with each command number from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571, and reproduces the sound data with the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R. Run with In the present embodiment, the sound data is stored in, for example, a wav format, but may be in another format.

  In FIG. 27, the command related to the command number “541” is a command for reproducing the voice heard by the character C2 on the telephone (the voice spoken by the character C1 as the other party on the telephone). That is, the command number “541” is a command for reproducing a voice (voice of the character C1 that can be heard over the telephone) when the voice of the character C1 being the other party is heard over the telephone. Here, as an example, the command number “541” is a command for reproducing the speech sound “Do you hear? My voice is”.

  In FIG. 27, the command related to the command number “542” is a command for reproducing the voice of the character C1 talking on the phone. Here, as an example, the command number “542” is a command for reproducing the speech sound “Do you hear? My voice is”.

  That is, the commands related to the command number “541” and the command number “542” are commands for reproducing the same dialogue sound “Do you hear? My voice is”, but the command number “541” Is a voice that can be heard over the telephone (hereinafter, referred to as "telephone voice"), the command number "542" is a normal voice (hereinafter, referred to as "normal voice"), and the sound data of both are different. I do.

  Note that the content of the dialogue is not limited to "Do you hear? My voice", and it is arbitrary. Hereinafter, the sound data corresponding to the command number “541” is referred to as “sound data related to telephone voice”, and the sound data corresponding to the command number “542” is also referred to as “sound data related to normal voice”.

  It should be noted that the sound data relating to the normal voice and the sound data relating to the telephone voice are formed such that, when they are simultaneously reproduced, the dialogue sounds "Do you hear? My voice" overlap. For example, sound data relating to a telephone voice may be generated by processing sound data relating to a normal voice, or vice versa. However, the sound data relating to the normal voice and the sound data relating to the telephone voice may be formed in such a manner that, when the reproduction is started at the same time, each speech sound has a slight deviation. The slight deviation of the dialogue sound may be a range in which the player cannot recognize the deviation or a range in which the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The sound data relating to the telephone voice may include a sound generated in the background of the character C2 (for example, a music sound when the character C2 is listening to music) as a sound other than the speech sound, or a normal voice. May include a sound (for example, a sound of an outside car) generated in the background of the character C1 as a sound other than the speech sound.

  In FIG. 27, the command number “550”, the command number “551”, and the command number “552” relate to commands related to each other. In FIG. 27, the commands related to the command number “550”, the command number “551”, and the command number “552” relate to various types of special moves possessed by the specific character C3. Specifically, the command number “550” is associated with “special technique A”. In this case, in the special technique A file, the voice (voice sound) of the character C3 screaming the dialogue “special technique A (technical name)” ) Is sound data for output. The command number “551” is associated with “special technique B”. In this case, the special technique B file is sound data for outputting a voice of the character C3 screaming the line “special technique B (technical name)”. is there. The command number “552” is associated with “special technique C”. In this case, the special technique C file is sound data for outputting a voice of the character C3 screaming the line “special technique C (technical name)”. is there.

  In FIG. 27, command numbers “571” and “572”, command numbers “573” and “574”, and command numbers “575” and “576” are commands related to each other. In FIG. 27, the commands related to the command numbers “571” and “572”, the command numbers “573” and “574”, and the command numbers “575” and “576” are related to the scene where the specific character C3 fights the enemy. This is a command for reproducing a sound relating to a scene in which various kinds of special moves possessed by the specific character C3 are advanced approximately three seconds after the start of reproduction. The command numbers “571” and “572” are associated with “special technique A”. In this case, the special technique A victory audio file and the special technique A defeat audio file relate to a scene in which the character C3 advances the special technique A. Sound data. Command numbers “573” and “574” are associated with “special technique B”. In this case, the special technique B victory audio file and the special technique B defeat audio file relate to a scene in which the character C3 advances the special technique B. Sound data. The command numbers “575” and “576” are associated with “special technique C”. In this case, the special technique C victory audio file and the special technique C defeat audio file relate to a scene in which the character C3 advances the special technique C. Sound data.

  Here, the sound data associated with the command numbers “571” and “572”, the command numbers “573” and “574”, and the command numbers “575” and “576” are speech sounds that cry out the corresponding special moves. Not included. The output of the speech sound shouting the special technique is command number “550”, command number “550” executed together with the command of command number “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575” or “576”. 551 ”or the command with the command number“ 552 ”.

  The difference between the command number “571” and the command number “572” is a difference in winning or losing after the character C3 has advanced the special attack A. Specifically, the deathblow technique A victory audio file associated with the command number “571” relates to a scene in which a special character C3 has a deathblow technique A and wins an enemy. The deathblow A defeat audio file associated with the command number “572” relates to a scene in which the deathblow A possessed by the specific character C3 has been delivered but is defeated by an enemy. The same applies to the difference between the command number “573” and the command number “574”, and the same applies to the difference between the command number “575” and the command number “576”. Note that if the enemy is won, the player is notified that a predetermined privilege (described later) is given, and if the enemy is defeated, the player is notified that the predetermined privilege (described later) is not provided. In the modified example, the result of winning or losing may be a specification that becomes clear after the next game.

  The parameter associated with the command number includes the channel (CH) of the digital amplifier 158. Although not shown, other parameters may include a sound data transfer rate (kbps), a sound data reproduction pattern (whether or not to perform loop reproduction), a type, and the like. The transfer rate (kbps) of the sound data is a parameter indicating a file capacity that can be transferred from the DSP 1571 to the digital amplifier 158 in one second when reproducing the sound data associated with each command number. The type is a parameter that defines a method of transferring sound data. For example, a type that is transferred from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571 via the audio RAM 1572, a method that is directly transferred from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571, and the like. Stipulate. Note that the method of transferring data from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571 via the audio RAM 1572 is more advantageous than the method of transferring data directly from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571 from the viewpoint of responsiveness. Preferably, it is associated with sound data.

  The channel (CH) is a parameter indicating an output channel to the digital amplifier 158. Here, in the pachislo 1 according to the present embodiment, the digital amplifier 158 has six channels, and is set as CH1 to CH6, respectively.

  For example, when executing a sound effect based on the command number associated with CH1 and a sound effect based on the command number associated with CH2, the sub CPU 151 corresponds to each of the channels CH1 and CH2 of the digital amplifier 158. It is configured to execute a sound effect in which sound data is input and a sound obtained by synthesizing the sound data input to CH1 and the sound data input to CH2 is reproduced from the digital amplifier 158.

  Note that, when continuous sound data is input to the same channel, the sub CPU 151 outputs the sound data input to the predetermined channel later even while the sound data input to the predetermined channel is being output first. Thus, the sound data input first is overwritten, and the sound data input later is reproduced from the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R.

  In FIG. 27, the command number “541” related to the telephone voice and the command number “542” related to the normal voice are associated with different CHs so that simultaneous playback is possible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, the command number "541" is associated with CH5, and the command number "542" is associated with CH6.

  In FIG. 27, the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552” are respectively the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576”. CHs different from the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” are associated with each other so that simultaneous reproduction is possible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552” are associated with CH6, and the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574” , “575”, and “576” are associated with CH5.

  The volume corresponds to an instruction value of a volume when outputting sound data associated with each command number. When executing the sound data associated with each command number, the sub CPU 151 transfers the indicated value of the volume associated with each command number to the digital amplifier 158.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when outputting the sound data associated with a specific command number, the sub CPU 151 may change the indicated value of the volume midway and transfer it to the digital amplifier 158. .

  Specifically, in FIG. 27, the command number “541” relating to the telephone voice is associated with two types of volumes “255” and “0”. The command number “542” for the normal voice is associated with two types of volumes “0” and “255”. Here, the volume is defined by a value from 0 to 255, and the larger the numerical value, the louder the volume. “0” corresponds to the mute volume. The volume “255” is a volume that can be heard by the player, for example, a settable maximum volume. Therefore, the volume of the volume “255” is much higher than the mute volume. The association between the two types of volumes “0” and “255” indicates that the volume can be switched between the volumes “0” and “255” when a switching condition described later is satisfied.

  For example, the command number “541” relating to the telephone voice is associated with the volume “255” before the switching condition is satisfied, and is associated with the volume “0” after the switching condition is satisfied. In this case, when the sound data associated with the command number “541” relating to the telephone voice is transferred to the digital amplifier 158, the sub CPU 151 sets the volume indication value to “255” before the switching condition is satisfied. When the switching condition is satisfied, the indicated value of the volume is set (changed) to “0”.

  Similarly, the command number “542” for the normal voice is associated with volume “0” before the switching condition is satisfied, and is associated with volume “255” after the switching condition is satisfied. In this case, when the sound data associated with the command number “542” for the normal voice is transferred to the digital amplifier 158, the sub CPU 151 sets the indicated value of the volume to “0” before the switching condition is satisfied. When the switching condition is satisfied, the indicated value of the volume is set (changed) to “255”.

  The other command numbers “550”, “551”, “552”, “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” are associated only with the volume “255”. Have been.

  The reproduction start condition relating to the sound data is a condition that is satisfied when the output of the sound data associated with each command number is started. The reproduction start condition is set for each command number. For example, in FIG. 27, the playback start condition of the command number “541” related to the telephone voice is “start switch on”. This means that the output of the sound data associated with the command number “541” is started with an event that the start switch 79 is turned on as a trigger. The same applies to the command number “542” related to the normal voice. The reproduction start condition “start switch on” may be replaced with another condition such as a lapse of a minute time after the start switch 79 is turned on or a start of reel rotation.

  In FIG. 27, the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552” related to various types of deathblow have a playback start condition “3 seconds after the start switch is turned on (an example of the first condition)”. . This means that the output of the sound data associated with the command number “550” is started with an event (trigger) of three seconds after the start switch 79 is turned on. Note that among the reproduction start conditions relating to the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552”, “start switch on” may be replaced with another condition such as the start of reel rotation. Good.

  The switching condition is a condition for switching between two types of volumes associated with a specific command number. The switching condition is associated only with a specific command number. In FIG. 27, the switching condition is associated with the command number “541” related to the telephone voice and the command number “542” related to the normal voice. The command number “541” related to the telephone voice and the command number “542” related to the normal voice are combinations of specific command numbers described later, and are registered as a set. The switching conditions associated with the command number “541” and the command number “542” are the same. In FIG. 27, the switching condition associated with the command number “541” and the command number “542” is “third stop operation”. This indicates that the event that the stop button of the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on satisfies the switching condition.

  In the modification, the switching condition may be satisfied when a stop button related to the first stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on, or the left stop button 17L, When the stop button related to the second stop among the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R is turned on, the condition may be satisfied. Alternatively, the switching condition is satisfied when the stop button related to the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is released (turned off after being turned on). You may.

  In another modification, the switching condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined operation. For example, the switching condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time ΔT2 elapses after the stop button related to the first stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on. In addition, the switching condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time ΔT3 has elapsed since the stop button related to the second stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on. In addition, the switching condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time ΔT4 elapses after the stop button related to the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on.

  The interrupt condition corresponds to a condition for forcibly executing the output of sound data associated with a predetermined command number. The interrupt condition is associated only with a predetermined command number. In FIG. 27, the interrupt condition is associated with a command number “550”, a command number “551”, and a command number “552” related to various types of deathblow. The interrupt condition associated with the command number “550”, the command number “551”, and the command number “552” is “third stop operation three seconds before the start switch is turned on”. That is, when three of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are turned on three seconds before the start switch 79 is turned on, the interruption condition is satisfied. . The condition (an example of the second condition) that the stop button of the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R among the interrupt conditions is turned on is an example of the left stop button 17L. Among the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R, the condition that the stop button related to the second stop is turned on, and the first stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R. It may be replaced by the condition that the stop button is turned on, the condition that the stop button related to the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is released from the pressed state, or the like. Good.

  Note that the sound data table shown in FIG. 27 is merely an example, and can be modified in various forms. For example, the sound data table shown in FIG. 27 may be realized by two or more separate tables. Further, the reproduction start condition and the interrupt condition may be realized by a program executed by the sub CPU 151 instead of the table format.

  FIG. 28A is a diagram illustrating an example of the animation data table. The animation data table is a table that is referred to when realizing a video effect corresponding to various effect contents. FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram of a video generated according to animation data associated with a command number.

  Using the animation data table shown in FIG. 28A, the sub CPU 151 transfers animation data associated with the command number (cmd No shown in FIG. 28A) corresponding to the determined effect content from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 to the DSP 1571, Perform video production.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, each command number is associated with a file name of animation data stored in the ROM cartridge 86 and a reproduction start condition of each animation data.

  The file name is the file name of the animation data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. When executing each video effect, the sub CPU 151 creates a video according to the animation data of the file name associated with each command number, and displays the created video on the display device 11 (projector 213) and / or the sub display device 18 To display.

  In FIG. 28A, the command number “641” is a command for creating a video according to the animation data of the scene (see FIG. 30) in which the character C2 is talking on the phone. In FIG. 28A, the command number “642” is a command for creating a video according to the animation data of the scene (see FIG. 31) in which the character C1 is talking on the phone. The command number “641” is used in combination with the command number “541” related to the telephone voice described above, and the command number “642” is used in combination with the command number “542” related to the normal voice described above. .

  The command number “642” and the command number “641” are commands related to a series of scenes of the character C1 speaking on the phone and the character C2 listening to the telephone. The command number “641” is a scene on the character C2 side. The command number “642” is the scene on the character C1 side, and the animation data of both are different. The animation data associated with the command number “642” and the animation data associated with the command number “641” cooperate to form a series of image effects.

  In FIG. 28A, command numbers “6501” and “6502”, command numbers “6511” and “6512”, and command numbers “6521” and “6522” are commands related to each other. The command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522” correspond to the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, and “574” related to the above-described sound data. , "575" and "576" respectively. For example, the command number “6501” is used in combination with the command number “571” related to the above-described sound data, and the command number “6502” is used in combination with the command number “572” related to the above-described sound data. Is done. In other words, the sound data associated with the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” are respectively the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, and “6511”. , "6512", "6521", and "6522" are generated so as to be synchronized with the video generated in association with the corresponding command number.

  In FIG. 28A, the commands related to the command numbers “6501” and “6502”, the command numbers “6511” and “6512”, and the command numbers “6521” and “6522” relate to the scene where the specific character C3 fights the enemy. . Specifically, the commands related to the command numbers “6501” and “6502”, the command numbers “6511” and “6512” and the command numbers “6521” and “6522” indicate various types of special moves possessed by the specific character C3. This command is used to create a video according to animation data including a scene to be advanced approximately three seconds after the start of reproduction. The command numbers “6501” and “6502” are associated with “special technique A”. In this case, the special technique A victory video file and the special technique A defeat video file are animation data portions in which the character C3 advances the special technique A. (Corresponding to the portion from frame M1 to frame M2 in FIG. 28B). Command numbers “6511” and “6512” are associated with “special technique B”. In this case, the special technique B victory video file and the special technique B defeat video file are animation data portions in which the character C3 performs the special technique B. (Corresponding to the portion from frame M1 to frame M2 in FIG. 28B). Command numbers “6521” and “6522” are associated with “special technique C”. In this case, the special technique C victory video file and the special technique C defeat video file are animation data portions in which the character C3 performs the special technique C. (Corresponding to the portion from frame M1 to frame M2 in FIG. 28B). The character C3 may be the same as the character C1 or the character C2, or may be different from the character C1 and the character C2.

  Each video generated in association with the command numbers “6501” and “6502”, the command numbers “6511” and “6512” and the command numbers “6521” and “6522” is used until the corresponding deadly technique is advanced. The scene may be a common video (for example, a video related to the motion of the attack) (a portion where the reproduction time from frame 1 to frame M1 in FIG. 28B is 3 seconds). In this case, the player cannot determine the type of the special move until the scene where the special move is advanced, so that the player who wants to know the type of the special move tends to delay the game tempo. As a result, gambling can be suppressed.

  The difference between the command number “6501” and the command number “6502” is a difference in winning or losing after the character C3 has executed the special attack A. Specifically, the deathblow technique A victory video file associated with the command number “6501” contains an animation data portion (frame M2 in FIG. 28B) that defeats the enemy by executing the special technique A possessed by the specific character C3. To the last frame). The animation file in which the deathblow A defeat image file associated with the command number “6502” is defeated by the enemy (due to being bounced off by the enemy, being dodged, etc.) even though the specific character C3 has advanced the deathblow A. A data portion (corresponding to a portion from the frame M2 to the last frame in FIG. 28B) is included.

  The same applies to the difference between the command number “6511” and the command number “6512”, and the same applies to the difference between the command number “6521” and the command number “6522”. That is, in each of the videos generated in association with the command numbers “6511” and “6512” and the command numbers “6521” and “6522”, the result scene after executing the deadly technique has the respective result (victory or defeat). ) May be different (the part from the frame M2 to the last frame in FIG. 28B). Note that if the enemy is won, the player is notified that a predetermined privilege (described later) is given, and if the enemy is defeated, the player is notified that the predetermined privilege (described later) is not provided.

  The command numbers “6501” and “6502” are used in combination with the command number “550” related to the sound data, and the command numbers “6511” and “6512” are combined with the command number “551” related to the sound data. And the command numbers “6521” and “6522” are used in combination with the command number “552” related to the sound data.

  Command numbers “6501” and “6502” are used in combination with command numbers “571” and “572” related to sound data, respectively, and command numbers “6511” and “6512” are used as sound data Are used in combination with the command numbers “573” and “574”, and the command numbers “6521” and “6522” are used in combination with the command numbers “575” and “576” related to the sound data, respectively. You. For example, the command number “6501” is used in combination with the command number “571”.

  The reproduction start condition according to the animation data is a condition that is satisfied when starting output of a video image associated with each command number. The video associated with the command number means a video generated according to the animation data associated with the command number. The reproduction start condition is set for each command number. In FIG. 28A, the playback start condition is associated with “start switch on” for all command numbers except the command number “642”. This indicates that the output of the video associated with all the command numbers except the command number “642” is started by an event that the start switch 79 is turned on (trigger). Note that “start switch on” may be replaced by another condition such as a lapse of a minute time after the start switch 79 is turned on or a start of reel rotation.

  The third stop operation is associated with the command number “642”. This is because the event that the stop button of the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on is the playback start condition (switching condition) of the video related to the command number “642”. Is satisfied. The video playback start condition associated with the command number “642” matches the above-described switching condition. The video associated with the command number “642” is output in a manner that switches with the video associated with the command number “641”.

  In FIG. 28A, two types of images (that is, for victory and for defeat) can be generated for the special technique A, but three or more images may be generated. The same applies to the special moves B and C. Further, a plurality of types of animation data of a scene in which the character C1 is talking on the phone and a plurality of types of animation data of a scene in which the character C2 is talking on the phone may be prepared. In this case, a variety of effects can be realized.

  Next, the effect processing executed by the sub control circuit 150 will be described. The rendering process includes a sound rendering process and an image rendering process. As described above, the sub control circuit 150 determines an effect corresponding to the type of the command data based on the received command data, and displays the display device 11 (projector 213), the sub display device 18, the speaker group 84, the LED The group 85 is driven to effect control. At that time, as described above with reference to FIG. 19, the sub-control circuit 150 executes an effect determination task (effect registration task) corresponding to the type of command data.

  The sub CPU 151 of the sub-control circuit 150 performs an effect process based on the result of the effect registration task. For example, the sub CPU 151 realizes the determined effect contents by outputting the animation data and the sound data registered in the registration processing.

  FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a function related to the rendering process according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the sub control circuit 150 includes a first sound effect processing unit 1500, a second sound effect processing unit 1502, a first image effect processing unit 1504, and a second image effect processing unit 1506. . In the first sound effect processing unit 1500, the second sound effect processing unit 1502, the first image effect processing unit 1504, and the second image effect processing unit 1506, the sub CPU 151 is stored in the storage unit (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 86). This can be achieved by executing a program.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500 functions when executing a process related to a combination of specific command numbers associated with a switching condition. The first sound effect processing unit 1500 outputs (reproduces) sound data associated with each specific command number related to the combination. Specifically, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 cooperates with the DSP 1571, the audio RAM 1572, and the digital amplifier 158 to output the sound related to the sound data associated with each specific command number related to the combination to the speaker 64L. , 64R.

  The combination of specific command numbers is a combination for realizing a sound effect in cooperation or cooperation. In the present embodiment, the specific command number combination is a combination of the command number “541” and the command number “542” shown in FIG. Note that the combination of specific command numbers is not limited to one, and a plurality of combinations may exist.

  In CH5 (an example of the first channel), the first sound effect processing section 1500 converts the sound data (an example of the first sound) relating to the telephone voice into two types of volumes associated with the command number “541”. The reproduction is selectively performed at a certain normal volume (an example of a first volume) and a mute volume (a volume = 0) (an example of a third volume). The normal volume associated with the command number “541” is a volume “255” as shown in FIG.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500 converts the sound data (an example of the second sound) related to the normal voice into two types of volumes associated with the command number “542” in CH6 (an example of the second channel). Playback is selectively performed at a certain normal volume (an example of a fourth volume) and a mute volume (a volume = 0) (an example of a second volume). The normal volume associated with the command number “542” is a volume “255” as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the normal volume associated with the sound data related to the normal voice and the normal volume associated with the sound data related to the telephone voice are the same, but may be different.

  When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 mutes the sound data related to the telephone voice at the normal volume and the sound data related to the normal voice via the speakers 64L and 64R (an example of a sound output unit). A process for starting reproduction at substantially the same volume (hereinafter, referred to as “first audio reproduction process”) is performed. “Almost at the same time” is a concept that allows a minute time such as a time lag by software. In the modified example, in the first audio reproduction process, sound data relating to a normal voice may be reproduced at a small volume (a volume significantly smaller than the volume “255”) instead of the mute volume.

  The reproduction start condition is optional, but in the present embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 27 and described above, the reproduction start condition is associated with the command number “541” and the command number “542”. . In the present embodiment, as an example, the reproduction start condition is satisfied when the start switch 79 is turned on.

  Specifically, in the first sound reproduction process, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 inputs the telephone voice file to the DSP 1571 with the instruction value of CH5 and the volume “255”, and the normal voice file to CH6 and CH6. Input with the indicated value of volume “0”. As a result, the DSP 1571 processes the sound data input from the sub CPU 151 so that the indicated value of each volume is realized, and inputs the processed data to the corresponding channel of the digital amplifier 158. After amplifying each input sound data, the digital amplifier 158 outputs the amplified sound data from, for example, the speakers 64L and 64R among the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L and 65R. Note that the volume adjustment function may be implemented by the digital amplifier 158.

  When the switching condition is satisfied during the first sound reproduction process, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 reduces the volume of the sound data related to the telephone voice from the normal volume to the mute volume, and sets the sound data related to the normal voice. A process of increasing the volume from the mute volume to the normal volume and continuing reproduction (hereinafter, referred to as “second audio reproduction process”) is executed. In the modification, in the second audio reproduction process, the sound data relating to the telephone voice may be reproduced at a small volume (a volume significantly smaller than the volume “255”) instead of the mute volume. Alternatively, in another modification, the second audio reproduction process may stop reproduction of sound data related to the telephone voice. In this case, the transfer of the sound data related to the telephone voice to the DSP 1571 may be stopped, or the input of the sound data related to the telephone voice to the digital amplifier 158 may be stopped.

  Specifically, in the second sound reproduction process, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 reduces the volume indication value of the telephone voice file being reproduced at the normal volume from “255” to “0”, and sets the mute volume. Increases the indicated value of the volume of the normal voice file being reproduced from "0" to "255". As a result, the DSP 1571 outputs sound data relating to the normal voice and sound data relating to the telephone voice whose volume has been changed, for example, from the speakers 64L and 64R among the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L and 65R.

  The second sound reproduction process is continued until a predetermined reproduction end condition is satisfied. The predetermined reproduction end condition may be, for example, when the reproduction of the normal voice file and the reproduction of the telephone voice file are completed, or when the start switch 79 for the next game is turned on. Alternatively, the predetermined reproduction end condition may be satisfied, for example, when a medal is inserted or when the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the switching condition can be satisfied in such a manner that the time from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied is indefinite. For example, the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied, that is, the time ΔT1 from when the start switch 79 is turned on to when the third stop operation is performed, is determined for each player or for each game. Can be different.

  In contrast to this, in the first comparative example, in consideration of the fact that the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied may vary, the normal voice file prepared for each different ΔT1 and the telephone A combination with a voice file is used. However, in the first comparative example, it is necessary to create and select different combinations of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file for each ΔT1. For example, if there are 50 types of ΔT1, it is necessary to create and select 50 normal voice files having different lengths and 50 telephone voice files having different lengths. In this case, there is a disadvantage that the number of design steps increases and the required storage area increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by providing the first sound effect processing unit 1500, the inconvenience caused in the first comparative example described above can be reduced. That is, in the present embodiment, the first audio reproduction process is executed based on one combination of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied until the switching condition is satisfied (time ΔT1). When the switching condition is satisfied, the second sound reproduction process is executed based on the same combination of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of combinations of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file, and the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied changes. it can.

  The second sound effect processing unit 1502 functions when executing a process related to a predetermined command number associated with an interrupt condition. The second sound effect processing unit 1502 outputs (reproduces) sound data associated with a predetermined command number. Specifically, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 cooperates with the DSP 1571, the audio RAM 1572, and the digital amplifier 158 to transmit a sound related to sound data associated with a predetermined command number via the speakers 64L and 64R. Output.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined command numbers are the command number “550”, the command number “551”, and the command number “552” shown in FIG. The predetermined command number is not limited to three, and may be one, two, or four or more. Further, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 outputs (reproduces) sound data associated with the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576”. .

  When the reproduction start condition is satisfied in CH5, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 relates to any one of the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576”. A base sound output process for outputting sound data is executed. The base voice output process is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when a medal is inserted or when the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player.

  In addition, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 executes a normal output process (an example of a first process) for outputting a specific effect sound based on a lapse of a predetermined time ΔT from the establishment of the reproduction start condition in CH6. The reproduction start condition is as described above. The predetermined time ΔT is arbitrary, but is 3 seconds in the present embodiment. The predetermined time ΔT may be adapted to delay the game tempo (the time required for one game) by the player, and may be other seconds than 3 seconds.

  The specific effect sound can indicate the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is given. Examples of benefits include payout of game media (medals and the like), operation of a replay (replay) in which internal lottery processing is performed again without consuming game media, operation of a bonus game in which the chance of paying out game media increases, ART and the like can be mentioned. The predetermined privilege is a privilege, such as the operation of a bonus game or an ART, of which the opportunity to pay out game media is relatively large among these various privileges.

  Preferably, a plurality of types of specific effect sounds can be output according to the degree of expectation. Thereby, the player can determine the degree of expectation that the predetermined privilege is given according to the difference in the type of the specific effect sound, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In FIG. 27, the specific effect sound corresponds to each sound data of the special technique A file, the special technique B file, and the special technique C file. For example, the special skill A has a higher degree of expectation than the special technique B, and the special technique B has a higher degree of expectation than the special technique C. In this case, the player does not perform the third stop operation until the predetermined time ΔT has elapsed, and waits for the output of the specific effect sound while looking forward to which one of the special moves A to C. be able to. As a result, the game tempo (time required for one game) by the player is likely to be long, and gambling can be suppressed.

  Further, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 prohibits the normal output process and outputs the specific effect sound on CH6 based on the establishment of the interrupt condition (the condition that is satisfied before the lapse of three seconds from the reproduction start condition). An output process (an example of a second process) is performed. The post-output process is a process of outputting a specific effect sound that is not output by the normal output process for a player who wants to know the type of the specific effect sound that should be output. The reason why the normal output process is prohibited in the post-output process is that the post-output process is a process of outputting a specific effect sound instead of the normal output process. That is, when the post-output processing is executed together with the normal output processing, the specific effect sound may be output in duplicate, and the output of the duplicated specific effect sound may give a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the condition that the third stop operation is detected among the interrupt conditions is satisfied in a mode in which the time from when the regeneration start condition is satisfied to when the condition is satisfied is undefined. It is possible. For example, the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the third stop operation is detected, that is, the time ΔT1 from when the start switch 79 is turned on to when the third stop operation is performed, is different for each player. Or from game to game. Therefore, the time ΔT1 until the third stop operation is detected is less than 3 seconds (predetermined time ΔT), or the time ΔT1 until the third stop operation is detected is 3 seconds (predetermined time ΔT). This may be the case.

  In this regard, in the second comparative example, in contrast to this, in the second comparative example, only when the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the third stop operation is performed is 3 seconds (predetermined time ΔT) or more, the specific effect sound is Is output. That is, in the second comparative example, if the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the third stop operation is performed is less than 3 seconds (the predetermined time ΔT), the specific effect sound is not output. , The game is terminated. In the second comparative example, by emphasizing the viewpoint of delaying the game tempo, there is an inconvenience that a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo but wants to know only the type of the specific effect sound feels inconvenient.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by providing the second sound effect processing unit 1502, the inconvenience caused in the second comparative example can be reduced. That is, in the present embodiment, if the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the third stop operation is performed is 3 seconds or more (predetermined time ΔT), 3 seconds after the reproduction start condition is satisfied. If the time ΔT1 from when the specific production sound is output and the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the third stop operation is performed is less than 3 seconds (predetermined time ΔT), the third stop operation Is performed (that is, the interruption condition is satisfied), a specific effect sound is output. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the gambling by inducing the delay of the game tempo, while not wanting to delay the game tempo, but wanting to know only the type of the specific effect sound (and the degree of expectation suggested by the type). Can meet the needs of players. That is, a player who wants to thoroughly enjoy the effect can hear the specific effect sound at normal timing by performing the third stop operation at least three seconds after the reproduction start condition is satisfied. On the other hand, a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo but wants to know only the type of the specific production sound can perform a third stop operation within less than three seconds after the reproduction start condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the game tempo. While maintaining the sound, the specific effect sound can be heard after the third stop operation.

  The first image effect processing unit 1504 functions when the first sound effect processing unit 1500 executes a process related to a specific command number combination. In the present embodiment, the first image effect processing unit 1504 executes an image effect process related to the command number “641” and the command number “642” in parallel with the first sound effect processing unit 1500.

  When the reproduction start condition associated with the command number “641” is satisfied, the first image effect processing unit 1504 associates the command number “641” via the display device 11 (an example of an image output unit). A process of outputting a video (an example of a first image) (hereinafter, referred to as “listener-side reproduction process”) is performed. The video associated with the command number “641” is a video of a scene related to the telephone voice as described above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the character C2 talks over the telephone. This is a video of the scene you are listening to.

  Specifically, when the reproduction start condition associated with the command number “641” is satisfied, the first image effect processing unit 1504 associates the video generated in S5 of FIG. 19 (corresponds with the command number “641”). Video). At this time, the first image effect processing unit 1504 outputs the video associated with the command number “641” without a pause or the like until the switching condition is satisfied or the video reaches the last frame.

  When the reproduction start condition associated with the command number “642” is satisfied, the first image effect processing unit 1504 displays, via the display device 11, the video (the second image of the second image) associated with the command number “642”. Is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “speaker-side reproduction processing”). The video associated with the command number “642” is a video of a scene related to a normal voice, as described above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the character C1 talks over the phone. It is a video of the scene that is.

  Specifically, when the reproduction start condition associated with the command number “642” is satisfied, the first image effect processing unit 1504 associates the video (command number “642”) generated in S5 of FIG. Video). At this time, the first image effect processing unit 1504 outputs the video associated with the command number “642” without pausing or the like until the video reaches the last frame or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. . The predetermined termination condition is as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for the combination of the command number “641” and the command number “642”, even if the command number “641” is being output first, When the playback start condition of the number “642” is satisfied, the video related to the command number “642” is output. That is, when the playback start condition of the command number “642” is satisfied while the video of the command number “641” is being output, the video of the command number “641” is switched to the video of the command number “642”. Can be At the time of video switching, a mode in which the video corresponding to the command number “641” fades out and the video corresponding to the command number “642” fades in may be realized. In switching the video, an animation in which the display frame of the video corresponding to the command number “641” moves to the background side while being reduced, and the display frame of the video corresponding to the command number “642” moves to the front side while being enlarged. May be realized.

  The second image effect processing unit 1506 functions when the process related to the predetermined command number associated with the interrupt condition is executed by the second sound effect processing unit 1502. In the present embodiment, the second image effect processing unit 1506 is in parallel with the second sound effect processing unit 1502, and has the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522”. Is performed.

  The second image effect processing unit 1506 determines that a playback start condition associated with any of the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522” is satisfied. A process of outputting a corresponding video via the display device 11 (an example of an image output unit) is performed.

  Specifically, the second image effect processing unit 1506 starts the reproduction start associated with any of the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522”. When the condition is satisfied, the image generated in S5 of FIG. 19 (the image associated with any of the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522”) ) Is output. For example, when the reproduction start condition associated with the command number “6501” is satisfied, the second image effect processing unit 1506 generates the image generated in S5 in FIG. 19 (the image associated with the command number “6501”). Is output. At this time, the first image effect processing unit 1504 outputs the video without stopping until the last frame of the video. Therefore, approximately three seconds after the start of the output, a scene in which the character C3 performs the deadly technique is output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 36, an example of an effect process realized in cooperation by the first sound effect processing unit 1500 and the first image effect processing unit 1504 will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a schematic flowchart of an example of the sound effect processing realized by the first sound effect processing unit 1500. The process shown in FIG. 32 is executed when the sound data corresponding to the command numbers “541” and “542” has been registered in S6 of FIG.

  In step S320, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 determines whether or not the reproduction start conditions related to the command numbers “541” and “542” are satisfied. The playback start conditions relating to the command numbers “541” and “542” are the same and “start switch on”. If the playback start conditions related to the command numbers “541” and “542” are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322; otherwise, the process waits for the playback start conditions to be satisfied.

  In step S322, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 executes a first sound reproduction process. As described above, in the first audio reproduction process, the sound data relating to the telephone voice associated with the command number “541” is associated with the command number “542” at the normal volume (instruction value = “255”). This is a process of starting the reproduction of the sound data relating to the normal voice at substantially the same mute volume (instruction value = “0”). In this case, the synthesized sound data of the sound data related to the telephone voice and the sound data related to the normal voice is output from the speakers 64L and 64R. As a result, the player does not hear the mute volume normal voice, but only the normal volume telephone voice.

  In step S324, first sound effect processing section 1500 determines whether or not a switching condition has been satisfied. The switching condition is satisfied when the third stop operation is detected, as described above. If the switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S326; otherwise, the process returns to step S322.

  In step S326, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 executes a second sound reproduction process. An example of the second audio reproduction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S328, first sound effect processing section 1500 determines whether or not a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S326. In this way, the second sound reproduction processing is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 33 is a schematic flowchart showing an example of the second audio reproduction process (step S326 in FIG. 32).

  In step S3260, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 determines that the previous value of the command value of the volume related to the command number “541” is “0” and the previous value of the command value of the volume related to the command number “542” is “ 255 "is determined. When the result of the determination is "YES", the flow proceeds to step S3262; otherwise, the flow proceeds to step S3264.

  In step S3262, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 relates to the telephone voice associated with the command number “541” without changing the indication values of the volumes related to the command number “541” and the command number “542”. The reproduction of the sound data associated with the sound data and the normal voice associated with the command number “542” is continued.

  In step S3264, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 reduces the designated value of the volume related to the command number “541” by a predetermined width from the previous value, and decreases the designated value of the volume related to the command number “542” from the previous value. Increase by a predetermined width. The predetermined width may be set so that the indicated value of the volume changes from “0” to “255” or from “255” to “0” over a time period of, for example, about 10 msec.

  For example, assuming that the processing cycle of the sound control is 4 msec and the predetermined width is a width corresponding to 16 steps, the indicated value of the volume related to the command number “541” is 255, 239, 223,. .., 15, 0, etc., are gradually reduced in 16 steps. On the other hand, the indicated value of the volume related to the command number “542” is gradually increased every 16 ms, such as 0, 15, 31,. In this case, the indication value of the volume is set to change from “0” to “255” or from “255” to “0” over a period of 4 msec × 16 = 64 msec.

  Assuming that the processing cycle is 4 msec and the predetermined width is a width corresponding to 64 steps, the indicated value of the volume related to the command number “541” is 255, 191, 127, 63, 0 every 4 msec. Specifically, it is gradually reduced by 64 steps. On the other hand, the indicated value of the volume related to the command number “542” is gradually increased by 64 steps, such as 0, 63, 127, 191, 255 every 4 msec. In this case, the volume indication value is set to change from "0" to "255" or from "255" to "0" over a period of 4 msec x 4 = 16 msec.

  Here, the indicated value of the volume is changed by a predetermined width in each processing cycle of the sound control, but is not limited to this. For example, the indicated value of the volume may be changed by a predetermined width every processing period of a predetermined number Ns of sound controls.

Generally, assuming that the fade time at the time of switching from the telephone voice to the normal voice is Tf, Tf is as follows.
Tf = m / k × Ns × Ts
Here, m is the number of steps (resolution) of the indicated value of the volume, and is, for example, 256, but is not limited thereto. k is the number of steps corresponding to the predetermined width (the number of steps that change each time). Ts is a processing cycle of the sound control, for example, 4 msec, but is not limited to this, and may be, for example, 8 msec.

  In step S3266, the first sound effect processing unit 1500 converts the sound data and the command number “542” related to the telephone voice associated with the command number “541” into the command number “542” based on each indication value of the volume changed in step S3264. The reproduction of the sound data relating to the associated normal voice is continued. In this case, the synthesized sound data of the sound data related to the telephone voice and the sound data related to the normal voice is output from the speakers 64L and 64R. Eventually, when the indication value of the volume related to the command number “541” becomes “0” (at the same time, the indication value of the volume related to the command number “542” becomes “255”), the mute volume of the player is reduced. You cannot hear the telephone voice, only the normal voice at normal volume.

  According to the processing shown in FIG. 33, the volume of the sound data relating to the normal voice is gradually reduced from the normal volume to the mute volume, and the volume of the sound data relating to the telephone voice is gradually increased from the mute volume to the normal volume. be able to. That is, the telephone voice can be faded in while the normal voice is faded out. As a result, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort (a sense of discomfort due to a sudden change in voice) when switching from the normal voice to the telephone voice. Note that, in the modified example, it is possible to switch from “0” to “255” or from “255” to “0” in one cycle without performing such a gradual change. In this case, the sudden change of the sound can give the player an impression that the scene has changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Switching with fade-in / fade-out and switching without fade-in / fade-out may be selectively used depending on the purpose of the effect. For example, switching with fade-in / fade-out and switching without fade-in / fade-out may be selectively used according to the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is given. Also, the fade time for fade-in / fade-out may be changed in multiple stages according to the purpose of the effect.

  FIG. 34 is a schematic flowchart of an example of the image effect processing realized by the first image effect processing unit 1504. The processing shown in FIG. 34 is executed when the animation data related to the command numbers “641” and “642” is registered in S5 of FIG.

  In step S340, first image effect processing section 1504 determines whether or not the reproduction start condition associated with command number “641” has been satisfied. The reproduction start condition for the command number “641” is “start switch on”. If the playback start condition related to the command number “641” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S342; otherwise, the process waits for the playback start condition to be satisfied.

  In step S342, the first image effect processing unit 1504 performs a listener-side reproduction process based on the animation data associated with the command number “641”. The listener-side reproduction process is a process of outputting a video (hereinafter, referred to as a “listener-side video”) associated with the command number “641” via the display device 11 as described above.

  In step S344, first image effect processing section 1504 determines whether or not the switching condition has been satisfied. The switching condition is the same as the playback start condition associated with the command number “641” (and the same as in step S324), and is satisfied when the third stop operation is detected as described above. If the switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S346; otherwise, the process returns to step S342.

  In step S346, the first image effect processing unit 1504 performs a speaker-side reproduction process based on the animation data associated with the command number “642”. As described above, the speaker-side reproduction process is a process of outputting a video “(hereinafter, referred to as“ speaker-side video ”)” associated with the command number “642” via the display device 11.

  In step S348, first image effect processing section 1504 determines whether or not a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is the same as that in step S328 described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S346. In this way, the speaker-side reproduction process is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  FIGS. 35 and 36 are explanatory diagrams of the effect processing according to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIGS. 35 and 36 show the case where the switching condition is satisfied at different timings, respectively. 35 and 36, the horizontal axis shows the passage of time, and from the top, an image diagram of a video output realized by the first image effect processing unit 1504, a changing mode of a scene, a dialogue, and a changing mode of a volume of a telephone voice. , And how the volume of the normal voice changes.

  35 and 36, the reproduction start condition is satisfied at time T1. When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound data relating to the telephone voice becomes the normal volume and the volume of the sound data relating to the normal voice becomes the mute volume by executing the first audio reproduction process. When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the listener-side reproduction processing is executed to output the listener-side video. Thereby, when the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the production of the scene on the listener side is realized.

  In FIG. 35, the switching condition is satisfied at time T2-1. When the switching condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound data related to the normal voice becomes the normal volume by executing the second sound reproduction process, and the volume of the sound data related to the telephone voice becomes the mute volume. Further, when the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the speaker-side reproduction processing is executed to output the speaker-side video. Thus, when the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the effect of the scene on the speaker side is realized.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 36, the switching condition is satisfied at a time T2-2 before the time T2-1. When the switching condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound data related to the normal voice becomes the normal volume by executing the second sound reproduction process, and the volume of the sound data related to the telephone voice becomes the mute volume. When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the listener-side reproduction processing is executed to output the listener-side video. Thereby, when the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the production of the scene on the listener side is realized.

  In FIG. 35, the part of the dialogue sound “Do you hear? My voice” is reproduced in the direction of the listener's scene, and the part of “My voice is” is reproduced. It is reproduced in the direction of the scene on the speaker's side.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 36, in the dialogue sound “Do you hear? My voice is”, the part “Hear” is reproduced in the direction of the scene on the listener's side, and “Do you hear me?” The "" part is reproduced in the production of the scene on the speaker's side.

  As described above, the switching position of the dialogue sound “Do you hear? My voice” changes according to the difference in the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, as described above, by changing the volume of the sound data related to the normal voice and the volume of the sound data related to the telephone voice, the sound that can be heard by the player is changed starting from the switching position. Can be. This allows different sounds to be output in synchronization with the switching of the video scene, so that the player can enjoy the effect without discomfort.

  Further, as described above, the switching position of the dialogue sound “Do you hear? My voice” can vary in accordance with the time ΔT1, but in the present embodiment, the telephone voice and the normal voice are changed. The sound effects corresponding to various times ΔT1 can be realized only by changing the timing of changing each volume according to the time ΔT1.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, unlike the sound data, the output of the speaker-side video starts from the video related to the same frame regardless of the time ΔT1. However, the reproduction of the listener-side video may be started from a start position corresponding to the time ΔT1. When the speaker-side video and the listener-side video include speech balloons (captions), the speaker-side video may be generated such that the speech balloon includes only the switched speech part.

  Such speech balloons can be useful in consideration of the environment of a game store. This is because, in a game arcade, normal voices and telephone voices may be difficult to hear due to sounds from other gaming machines, in-store broadcast sounds, game medium payout sounds, and the like.

  Here, when the speaker-side image and the listener-side image include part or all of a speech balloon (caption), it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is given by the color or font of the speech balloon. May be done. For example, when the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is given is high, the color of a character (for example, white) suggesting a relatively low degree of expectation is set in the listener's side image. Then, the color of the character (for example, red) suggesting a relatively high degree of expectation may be changed. In this case, the player can enjoy switching from the listener's side image to the speaker's side image while enjoying the character color in the speaker's side image. In this way, by associating the expected degree suggestion in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to enhance the interest in sound production.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the above-described character color and font of the speech balloon, other elements are used to change the degree of expectation before and after switching from the listener's side video to the speaker's side video, or to change the degree of expectation after switching. A suggested effect may be generated. For example, a plurality of types of speaker-side images and / or listener-side images may be prepared, and the types of the speaker-side images and / or the listener-side images to be reproduced may be changed according to the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is given. Specifically, as an example, two types of speaker-side video and listener-side video with a background of day and night may be prepared. In this case, for example, the degree of expectation differs between when the speaker's side image with the background is reproduced and when the speaker's side image with the background is reproduced.For example, when the speaker's side image with the background at night is reproduced. Has higher expectations. In addition to the background, various kinds of speaker-side images and listener-side images in which the expressions and clothes of the character C1 and / or the character C2 are different may be prepared. By doing so, attention to the switching effect can be increased.

  Further, from the same viewpoint, two or more types of normal voice and / or telephone voice may be prepared, and the type of the normal voice may be changed according to the degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is given. For example, the normal voice and / or the telephone voice may have different voice tones or speeds depending on the type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, in the telephone scene, the listener's side scene is set before the speaker's side scene, but may be reversed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37 to FIG. 41, an example of the rendering process realized in cooperation with the second sound rendering processor 1502 and the second image rendering processor 1506 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a sound effect process (sound effect process related to CH6) realized by the second sound effect processing unit 1502. The process shown in FIG. 37 is executed when sound data relating to any of the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552” has been registered in S6 of FIG.

  In step S370, second sound effect processing section 1502 determines whether or not start switch 79 has been turned on. If the start switch 79 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S372; otherwise, the process waits for the start switch 79 to be turned on.

  In step S372, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 starts a timer that times out in three seconds.

  In step S374, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 determines whether the timer has timed out. When the timer times out, the process proceeds to step S378; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S376.

  In step S376, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 determines whether the third stop operation has been detected. If the third stop operation has been detected, the process proceeds to step S378; otherwise, the process returns to step S374. That is, in steps S374 and S376, a state is reached in which the timer times out or the third stop operation is detected. Then, when the third stop operation is detected or when the timer times out, the process proceeds to step S378. The process proceeds to step S378 both when the timer times out and when the third stop operation is detected. However, when the third stop operation is detected before the timer times out, the process proceeds to step S374 without returning to step S374. Since the process proceeds to S378, the normal output process (the process of outputting the specific effect sound based on the timeout of the timer) is prohibited.

  In step S378, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 executes a process of outputting a specific effect sound. At this time, the specific effect sound to be output is associated with the command number registered in S6 of FIG. 19 among the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552”. That is, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 outputs a file related to the command number registered in S6 of FIG. 19 among the special technique A file, the special technique B file, and the special technique C file. Note that the process of step S378 when “YES” is determined in step S374 and the process proceeds to step S378 corresponds to the above-described normal output process, and the process in the case where “YES” is determined in step S376 and the process proceeds to step S378. The process of S378 corresponds to the post-output process described above.

  In step S380, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 determines whether the output of the specific effect sound has been completed. If the output of the specific effect sound has been completed, the process ends; otherwise, the process returns to step S378. In this way, the output processing of the specific effect sound (normal output processing or post-output processing) is continued until the output of the specific effect sound is completed.

  According to the processing shown in FIG. 37, the normal output processing is executed when the timer times out without detecting the third stop operation, and the post-output processing is executed when the third stop operation is detected before the timer times out. Is done. Thus, as described above, while suppressing gambling by inducing the player to delay the game tempo, the specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo but wants to know only the type of the specific production sound We can meet your needs.

  In FIG. 37, once the output process of the specific effect sound (normal output process or post-output process) is started, the output process of the specific effect sound is continued until the output of the specific effect sound is completed. Thus, in any case of the normal output processing and the post-output processing, the effect of the specific effect sound can be enhanced by having the player listen to the specific effect sound to the end. However, in the modified example, if the predetermined end condition is satisfied before the output of the specific effect sound is completed after the output process of the specific effect sound is started, the output process of the specific effect sound may be ended. As described above, the predetermined end condition is, for example, when a medal is inserted or when the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. May be different from the above.

  For example, the predetermined end condition relating to the output processing of the specific effect sound may be satisfied at the time of the bonus operation due to the bonus prize. Specifically, the predetermined end condition relating to the output processing of the specific effect sound may be satisfied when the symbol combination relating to the bonus is stopped and displayed on the activated line and the bonus is activated. In this case, a sound effect (fanfare or the like) related to the bonus prize is output, and after the start of the output of the sound effect, the specific effect sound is not output (stopped halfway). As described above, the specific effect sound can indicate the degree of expectation that the predetermined privilege is given, but this suggestion is unnecessary when the bonus is activated. In other words, if the bonus has already been activated, it is a situation where an advantageous state is definitely reported without any suggestion from the viewpoint of expectation degree suggestion. This is because the more it is executed, the more interesting it becomes.

  Further, the predetermined end condition relating to the output processing of the specific effect sound may be satisfied when the bonus confirmation effect is generated. For example, the predetermined end condition relating to the output processing of the specific effect sound is that a predetermined privilege such as a voice such as “bonus determined!” Or “hit determined!” Is given with higher reliability than the specific effect sound. This is because when a sound effect that can be suggested is executed, no suggestion by a specific effect sound is required at that time. That is, the specific effect sound may not be output from the viewpoint that even when the final notification effect of the state where the predetermined privilege is given occurs, the effect indicating the degree of expectation does not need to be performed any more ( May be stopped halfway).

  Further, the predetermined end condition relating to the output processing of the specific effect sound may be satisfied when a predetermined error occurs in the pachislot 1. The predetermined error is arbitrary, for example, an error with a high degree of alertness, and more specifically, an error that may cause damage to the player due to unexpected behavior, This is an error for preventing the so-called goto action. An error notification sound that is output when such a predetermined error occurs (for example, a sound such as "An error has occurred, please call a staff member" or another alarm sound) has priority over other sounds. Output. From such a viewpoint, when the error notification sound is output, the specific effect sound may not be output (may be stopped halfway). In addition, as the predetermined error, there are other errors such as a door opening error, a jam of a game medium, an error such as a hopper empty, a hopper jam, an overflow, a communication abnormality or a set value abnormality in the main control circuit 90 or the sub control circuit 150, and a RAM. Various errors such as abnormalities may be used.

  FIG. 38 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a sound effect process (sound effect process related to CH5) realized by the second sound effect processing unit 1502. The processing shown in FIG. 38 is performed when the sound data relating to any of the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” is registered in S6 of FIG. Then, it is executed in parallel with the processing of FIG. In the following description of FIG. 38, among the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576”, the registered command number is simply referred to as “registered voice command”. Number ".

  In step S382, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 determines whether the reproduction start condition associated with the registered voice command number has been satisfied. Here, as for the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576”, the reproduction start condition is “start switch on” as described above. . If the reproduction start condition has been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S384; otherwise, the process waits for the reproduction start condition to be satisfied.

  In step S384, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 outputs sound data associated with the registered voice command number (base sound output processing).

  In step S386, the second sound effect processing unit 1502 determines whether a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S384.

  FIG. 39 is a schematic flowchart of an example of the image effect processing realized by the second image effect processing unit 1506. The processing shown in FIG. 39 is performed when the animation data related to any of the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522” is registered in S5 of FIG. Then, it is executed in parallel with each processing of FIGS. 37 and 38. In the following description of FIG. 39, among the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522”, the registered command number is simply referred to as “registered video command”. Number ".

  In step S390, second image effect processing section 1506 determines whether or not the reproduction start condition associated with the registered video command number has been satisfied. Here, as for the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512”, “6521”, and “6522”, the reproduction start condition is “start switch on” as described above. . If the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S392; otherwise, the process waits for the reproduction start condition to be satisfied.

  In step S392, the second image effect processing unit 1506 performs a video reproduction process based on the animation data associated with the registered video command number.

  In step S394, the second image effect processing unit 1506 determines whether a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S392. In this way, the video reproduction process based on the animation data associated with the registered video command number is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  In FIG. 39, the output mode of the video generated based on the animation data associated with the registered video command number is such that the output processing of the specific effect sound by the second sound effect processing unit 1502 is the normal output processing and the post-output. The processing is the same in any case, but may be different. For example, when the output processing of the specific effect sound by the second sound effect processing unit 1502 is the post-output processing, the video being reproduced may be skipped to the start position of the scene where the corresponding deadly technique is executed. In this case, the sound being reproduced (sound data associated with the registered voice command number in FIG. 38) may be skipped to the start position of the scene where the corresponding deadly technique is to be executed.

  FIGS. 40 and 41 are illustrations of the effect processing according to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIGS. 40 and 41 show the case where the third stop operation is detected at different timings, respectively. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of the effect processing according to the third comparative example. 40 to 41, the abscissa direction indicates the passage of time, and the detection state of the third stop operation and the output state of the specific effect sound are shown from the top. In FIGS. 40 and 41, in the detection state of the third stop operation, the notation “ON” indicates that the stop button related to the third stop among the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is turned on. In the output state of the specific effect sound, the notation “play” indicates a state in which the specific effect sound is being output.

  In FIGS. 40 and 41, the reproduction start condition is satisfied at time T11. When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, a video corresponding to the registered video command number is output. At this time, the registered voice command numbers (command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576”) related to the sound effect to be set as the registered video command number Is reproduced synchronously (see FIG. 38).

  In FIG. 40, the timer times out at time T22-1 (three seconds elapse after the reproduction start condition is satisfied). When the timer times out, the specific effect sound starts to be output. Then, in FIG. 40, the third stop operation is detected at time T33-1 after the output of the specific effect sound is completed. In addition, even if the third stop operation is detected at the time T33-1, the specific effect sound is not output (duplicately) in response thereto. Thereafter, at time T44-1, the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, and the current game is ended. In this case, since the third stop operation is detected after the time point T22-1, the game tempo is slower than that in FIG. 41 described later.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 41, the third stop operation is detected at time T33-2 before the timer times out at time T22-1 (three seconds elapse after the reproduction start condition is satisfied). In this case, when the third stop operation is detected, the specific effect sound starts to be output (time T22-2). In FIG. 41, at time T44-2 before the output of the specific effect sound is completed (and before the timer times out), the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the current game is ended. In this case, the output of the specific effect sound is continued even after the current game is over. In the modification, as described above, the output of the specific effect sound may be ended when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  As described above, the timing at which the specific effect sound starts to be output changes depending on whether or not the third stop operation is detected three seconds after the reproduction start condition is satisfied. That is, when the third stop operation is detected before the lapse of three seconds after the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the timing at which the specific effect sound starts to be output is longer than three seconds after the reproduction start condition is satisfied. Can be hastened.

  The third comparative example shown in FIG. 42 has a configuration in which the specific effect sound is output only when three seconds have elapsed since the reproduction start condition was satisfied. In the third comparative example, when the third stop operation is detected at time T33-2 before the time-out of the timer at time T22-1, as shown in FIG. The possibility that the termination condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player with a fast game tempo continues to play the game without hearing the specific effect sound, and the interest is reduced.

  In this embodiment, the sound data of the telephone voice and the sound data of the normal voice are synthesized and output from the same speakers 64L and 64R. However, in a modified example, the sound data of the telephone voice and the sound data of the normal voice are output. The sound data may be output from separate speakers 64L and 64R. For example, the sound data of the telephone voice may be output from the speaker 64L, and the sound data of the normal voice may be output from the speaker 64R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the DSP 1571 implements the volume change processing (change from mute volume to normal volume and vice versa) for telephone voice sound data and normal voice sound data, but the sub CPU 151 implements it. You may.

  Also, the present embodiment relates to switching between two scenes, a listener's side scene and a speaker's side scene, in the telephone scene, but the present invention can also be applied to switching of three or more scenes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the telephone scene, the listener's side scene is switched to the speaker's side scene, but the listener's side scene is switched to the speaker's side scene, and thereafter, the speaker's side scene is again switched to the listener's side scene. The present invention is applicable to such an embodiment.

  Further, the present embodiment relates to the switching of the voice between the telephone voice and the normal voice, but is also applicable to the switching of a non-voice sound (for example, SE sound or music sound). For example, with respect to music sounds, when switching between sound data containing only accompaniment sounds and sound data containing accompaniment sounds and vocal sounds, or switching between sound data containing only accompaniment sounds and sound data containing only vocal sounds In such cases, the present invention may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the switching condition between the telephone voice and the normal voice is a condition related to the operation of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the switching condition between the telephone voice and the normal voice may be a condition that does not affect the operation of the player (however, preferably, a condition that is satisfied at an undefined timing after the reproduction start condition is satisfied). .

[Second Embodiment of Effect Processing]
Next, a second embodiment of the effect processing will be described. The second embodiment of the effect processing differs from the first embodiment of the effect processing in the way of using the channel for outputting the specific effect sound. In the following, mainly different parts from the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing will be described. In the second embodiment of the effect processing, the animation data table shown in FIG. 28A is used.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a sound data table suitable for use in the present embodiment. The sound data table is a table that is referred to when realizing a sound effect corresponding to various effect contents. In FIG. 43, the notation “−” indicates a state in which the corresponding condition or the like is not defined. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the sound data (interruption sound data) related to the command number “5500” and the sound data (normal sound data) related to the command number “5710”.

  The sound data table shown in FIG. 43 is different from the sound data table shown in FIG. 27 in that the interrupt conditions are eliminated and the command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552” are replaced by the command numbers “5500” and “5501”. , “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, “5521”, and the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” The difference is that command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” are replaced.

  Command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521” have command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”. , And "5760" (here, CH6).

  The command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521” are associated with the reproduction start condition “third stop operation three seconds before the start switch is turned on”. . Hereinafter, the sound data associated with the command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521” are also referred to as “interruption sound data”.

  The command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” are associated with the reproduction start condition “start switch on”. Hereinafter, the sound data associated with the command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” are also referred to as “normal sound data”.

  The normal sound data corresponds to the sound data corresponding to the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” in the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing. The difference is that it includes a dialogue sound that screams a special move. That is, the sound data associated with the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” in the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing screams a deadly technique. While the speech sound (specific production sound) is not included, the normal sound data in the second embodiment of the production process includes a speech sound (specific production sound) that screams a deadly technique. Otherwise, it is the same. Specifically, the sound data (normal sound data) associated with the command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” are respectively processed by the above-described effect processing. And sound data associated with the command numbers “571”, “572”, “573”, “574”, “575”, and “576” in the first embodiment, ) Is the same except for the point including). For example, the command number "5710" is the same as the command number "571" in the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing except that the command number "5710" includes a speech sound that screams the special technique A, and the command number "5720" is the special number. It is the same as the command number “572” in the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing except that it includes a speech sound that screams the technique A.

  Here, the difference between the normal sound data and the interrupt sound data is whether or not the sound data portion up to the scene where the deadly technique is performed is included. More specifically, the normal sound data includes, as schematically shown in FIG. 44, a sound data portion A1 up to a scene where a special move is performed, and a sound data portion of a scene where a special move is performed (that is, a scene where a special move is screamed). A2 and a sound data portion A3 of the result scene after the special technique has been executed. On the other hand, the interrupt sound data includes only the sound data portion A2 and the sound data portion A3. The sound data portion A1 has a reproduction length of about 3 seconds (a length corresponding to the predetermined time ΔT).

  The command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” correspond to the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512” “of the animation data. 6521 "and" 6522 ". For example, the command number “5710” is used in combination with the command number “6501” related to animation data, the command number “5720” is used in combination with the command number “6502” related to animation data, and so on. .

  The command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521” correspond to the command numbers “6501”, “6502”, “6511”, “6512” related to the animation data. "6521" and "6522" are used as a set. For example, the command number "5500" is used in combination with the command number "6501" related to animation data, the command number "5501" is used in combination with the command number "6502" related to animation data, and so on. .

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a function related to the rendering process according to the second embodiment. The function related to the effect processing according to the second embodiment is different from the function related to the effect processing according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 29) in that the second sound effect processing unit 1502A is used by the second sound effect processing unit 1502A. Is different. The first sound effect processor 1500, the first image effect processor 1504, and the second image effect processor 1506 may be the same as in the first embodiment.

  The second sound effect processing unit 1502A functions when executing a process related to a predetermined command number associated with the interrupt sound data. In the present embodiment, the predetermined command numbers are the command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521” shown in FIG. As described above, the command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521” correspond to the command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”. , “5750”, and “5760” are used as a set. For example, the command number “5500” is used in combination with the command number “5710”, the command number “5501” is used in combination with the command number “5720”, and so on.

  When the reproduction start condition is satisfied in CH6, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A executes a sound output process.

  Here, the reproduction start condition of the normal sound data is “start switch on”, whereas the reproduction start condition of the interruption sound data is “third stop operation three seconds before the start switch is turned on”. Therefore, the reproduction start condition of the normal sound data is satisfied earlier than the reproduction start condition of the interrupt sound data.

  When the reproduction start condition of the normal sound data is satisfied in CH6, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A executes a normal sound output process of outputting the normal sound data. The normal sound output process is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. However, the normal audio output processing may be replaced (interrupted) by an interrupt audio output processing described later. In this case, the normal audio output processing substantially ends when replaced by the later-described interrupt audio output processing.

  When the reproduction start condition of the interrupt sound data is satisfied in CH6, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A executes a normal sound output process of outputting the interrupt sound data. The interrupt sound output process is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above.

  Here, the reproduction start condition of the interrupt sound data is “third stop operation three seconds before the start switch is turned on”. The time ΔT1 from the establishment of the normal sound data reproduction start condition to the detection of the third stop operation, that is, the time ΔT1 from when the start switch 79 is turned on to when the third stop operation is performed, is a game time. It can vary from player to player or from game to game. Therefore, the time ΔT1 until the third stop operation is detected is less than 3 seconds (predetermined time ΔT), or the time ΔT1 until the third stop operation is detected is 3 seconds (predetermined time ΔT). This may be the case.

  In the present embodiment, effects similar to those of the above-described first embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the present embodiment, by providing the second sound effect processing unit 1502A, the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition of the normal sound data is satisfied to when the third stop operation is performed is 3 seconds (the predetermined time ΔT). In the above case, when the specific sound effect is output by the normal sound data reproduction and the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the third stop operation is performed is less than 3 seconds (the predetermined time ΔT). , A specific effect sound is output by reproducing the sound data for interruption. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the gambling by inducing the delay of the game tempo, while not wanting to delay the game tempo, but wanting to know only the type of the specific effect sound (and the degree of expectation suggested by the type). Can meet the needs of players.

  Next, the sound output processing executed by the second sound effect processing unit 1502A will be further described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a schematic flowchart of an example of sound effect processing realized by the second sound effect processing unit 1502A in CH6. The processing shown in FIG. 46 is performed by the command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, “5521”, “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, This is executed when sound data (for example, a set of command numbers “5500” and “5710”) related to one set of “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” is registered. In the following description of FIG. 46, among the command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521”, the registered command number is simply referred to as “registered voice interrupt”. Command number ”. The registered command number among the command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760” is simply referred to as “registered voice normal command number”.

  In step S460, second sound effect processing section 1502A determines whether or not a reproduction start condition associated with the registered voice normal command number has been satisfied. Here, as for the command numbers “5710”, “5720”, “5730”, “5740”, “5750”, and “5760”, the reproduction start condition is “start switch on” as described above. . If the reproduction start condition associated with the registered voice normal command number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S462; otherwise, the process waits for the reproduction start condition associated with the registered voice normal command number to be satisfied. State.

  In step S462, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A outputs normal sound data associated with the registered voice normal command number. That is, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A cooperates with the DSP 1571, the audio RAM 1572, and the digital amplifier 158 to output sounds related to normal sound data via the speakers 64L and 64R.

  In step S464, second sound effect processing section 1502A determines whether or not a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S466.

  In step S466, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A determines whether the reproduction start condition associated with the registered voice interruption command number has been satisfied. Here, as for the command numbers “5500”, “5501”, “5510”, “5511”, “5520”, and “5521”, the reproduction start condition is “3 seconds after the start switch is turned on,” as described above. The previous third stop operation ". If the playback start condition associated with the registered voice interruption command number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S468; otherwise, the process returns to step S462.

  In step S468, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A outputs the interruption sound data associated with the registered voice interruption command number. That is, the second sound effect processing unit 1502A outputs the sound related to the interrupt sound data via the speakers 64L and 64R in cooperation with the DSP 1571, the audio RAM 1572, and the digital amplifier 158.

  In step S470, second sound effect processing section 1502A determines whether or not a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S468.

  According to the processing shown in FIG. 46, when three seconds have elapsed without the third stop operation being detected since the start switch 79 was turned on, the specific effect sound included in the normal sound data is output. If the third stop operation is detected before three seconds have elapsed since the is turned on, the specific effect sound included in the interrupt sound data is output. Thus, as described above, while suppressing gambling by inducing the player to delay the game tempo, the specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo but wants to know only the type of the specific production sound We can meet your needs.

[Third Embodiment of Effect Processing]
Next, a third embodiment of the effect processing will be described. The third embodiment of the effect processing differs from the first embodiment of the effect processing described above in that the sound image position (the sound source direction felt by the player when hearing the sound) is changed between the telephone voice and the normal voice. different. It should be noted that a technique relating to this type of sound image localization is widely known and will not be described in detail here. In the following, mainly different parts from the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing will be described. In the third embodiment of the effect processing, the animation data table shown in FIG. 28A is used.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a sound data table suitable for use in the present embodiment. The sound data table is a table that is referred to when realizing a sound effect corresponding to various effect contents.

  The sound data table shown in FIG. 47 differs from the sound data table shown in FIG. 27 in that command numbers “541” and “542” are replaced with command numbers “541B” and “542B”, and The difference is that the sound image positions are associated.

  The sound data associated with the command numbers “541B” and “542B” is different from the sound data associated with the command numbers “541” and “542” in that the sound image position is associated with the sound data. Other than the processing related to, the usage method and the like are the same.

  Different sound image positions are associated with the command numbers “541B” and “542B”. In FIG. 47, the command number “541B” is associated with “the left side of the player”, and the command number “542B” is associated with the “right side of the player”.

  FIG. 48 is a block diagram illustrating an example of functions related to the rendering processing according to the third embodiment. The function related to the effect processing according to the third embodiment is different from the function related to the effect processing according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 29) in that the first sound effect processing unit 1500 has the first sound effect processing unit 1500B. Is different. The second sound effect processing unit 1502, the first image effect processing unit 1504, and the second image effect processing unit 1506 may be the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500B functions when executing processing relating to a combination of specific command numbers associated with the switching condition. In the present embodiment, the specific command number combination is a combination of the command number “541B” and the command number “542B” shown in FIG. Note that the combination of specific command numbers is not limited to one, and a plurality of combinations may exist.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500B converts the sound data (an example of the first sound) related to the telephone voice into two types of volumes associated with the command number “541B” in CH5 (an example of the first channel). The reproduction is selectively performed at a certain normal volume (an example of a first volume) and a mute volume (a volume = 0) (an example of a third volume). The normal volume associated with the command number “541B” is the volume “255” as shown in FIG.

  Further, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B gives the DSP1571 an instruction value of the sound image position so that the sound image position of the telephone voice is on the left side of the player in CH5. The DSP 1571 controls the output mode from the speakers 64L and 64R so that the telephone voice can be heard from the left side of the player. That is, the DSP 1571 controls the sound volume and phase of the sound data output to the speakers 64L, 64R (or the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R), so that the sound image localization such that a sound image is formed on the left side of the player. Causes the speakers 64L, 64R (or the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R) to output voice related to the telephone voice. Note that the first sound effect processing unit 1500B instructs the sound image position so that the output sound can be heard from the left side of the player only while instructing the normal volume as the volume of the telephone voice in CH5.

  The method of localizing a sound image at a specified position (such as the left side of a player) in a three-dimensional space as described above may be realized by an operation based on a head-related transfer function. The head-related transfer function is a virtual setting of a three-dimensional space in a direction in which a player in front of the pachislot 1 faces the pachislot 1, and a sound assumed to be generated at a specific position in the three-dimensional space is It is a function for obtaining acoustic characteristics until reaching each of both ears of the player. The head-related transfer function is such that, for example, in the case where a model of a hard sphere simulating the head of a player is arranged in front of the pachislot 1, a sound generated at a certain position reaches the corresponding positions of both ears of the hard sphere. A known method such as calculating the sound pressure as an approximate expression that is a function of time and coordinate position can be used (for example, Hamada, “3D playback with two-channel speaker—from principle to application”, JAS journal 1998). April issue extra edition). More specifically, for example, a sound source is set at a designated position in a three-dimensional space, and the space including the position of the player and the three-dimensional space is subdivided into cells. Then, by solving the pressure transfer function for each cell, an impulse response that simulates the sound reaching the binaural equivalent position of the hard sphere when the sound having the impulse waveform is output from the sound source is obtained as the head-related transfer function. The impulse response characteristics thus determined are stored in advance for each designated position. The DSP 1571 performs a convolution operation on the transferred sound data with an impulse response characteristic corresponding to the designated position. At this time, signal processing by a digital filter that removes a crosstalk component in the sound field to be reproduced (the sound source is the speakers 64L and 64R) may be executed. When the sound data processed in this way is output from the speakers 64L and 64R, the player who hears the sound sounds as if the sound source is at the designated position. That is, the sound image can be localized at the designated position in the three-dimensional space by the processing of the sound image processing means 201.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500B converts the sound data (an example of the second sound) relating to the normal voice into two types of volumes associated with the command number “542B” in CH6 (an example of the second channel). Playback is selectively performed at a certain normal volume (an example of a fourth volume) and a mute volume (a volume = 0) (an example of a second volume). The normal volume associated with the command number “542B” is the volume “255” as shown in FIG.

  Further, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B gives the DSP1571 an instruction value of the sound image position so that the sound image position of the normal voice is on the right side of the player in CH6. The DSP 1571 controls the output mode from the speakers 64L and 64R so that the normal voice can be heard from the right side of the player. That is, the DSP 1571 controls the sound volume and phase of the sound data output to the speakers 64L, 64R (or the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R), so that the sound image localization such that a sound image is formed on the right side of the player. Causes the speakers 64L, 64R (or the speakers 64L, 64R, 65L, 65R) to output sounds related to the normal voice. Note that the first sound effect processing unit 1500B instructs the sound image position so that the output sound can be heard from the right side of the player only while instructing the normal volume as the normal voice volume in CH6.

  When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B reproduces the sound data related to the telephone voice at the normal volume and the sound data related to the normal voice at the mute volume substantially simultaneously via the speakers 64L and 64R. A process for starting (first audio reproduction process) is performed. In the modified example, in the first audio reproduction process, sound data relating to a normal voice may be reproduced at a small volume (a volume significantly smaller than the volume “255”) instead of the mute volume.

  When the switching condition is satisfied during the first sound reproduction process, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B reduces the volume of the sound data related to the telephone voice from the normal volume to the mute volume, and sets the sound data related to the normal voice. A process of increasing the volume from the mute volume to the normal volume and continuing the reproduction (second audio reproduction process) is executed. In the modification, in the second audio reproduction process, the sound data relating to the telephone voice may be reproduced at a small volume (a volume significantly smaller than the volume “255”) instead of the mute volume. In another modification, the second sound reproduction process may stop reproduction of sound data related to the telephone voice.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the sound output processing executed by the first sound effect processing unit 1500B will be further described.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic flowchart of an example of the sound effect processing realized by the first sound effect processing unit 1500B in CH6. The process shown in FIG. 49 is executed when the sound data corresponding to the command numbers “541B” and “542B” has been registered in S6 of FIG.

  In step S491, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B determines whether or not the playback start conditions related to the command numbers “541B” and “542B” are satisfied. The playback start conditions relating to the command numbers “541B” and “542B” are the same and “start switch on”. If the playback start conditions related to the command numbers “541B” and “542B” are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S492; otherwise, the process waits for the satisfaction of the playback start conditions.

  In step S492, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B sets the designated value of the sound image position to “left side of the player”.

  In step S493, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B executes a first sound reproduction process. As described above, in the first audio reproduction process, the sound data relating to the telephone voice associated with the command number “541B” is associated with the command number “542B” at the normal volume (instruction value = “255”). In this process, the sound data relating to the normal voices are reproduced at substantially the same mute volume (instruction value = "0"). In this case, the synthesized sound data of the sound data related to the telephone voice and the sound data related to the normal voice is transmitted from the speakers 64L and 64R so as to be heard from the left side of the player according to the instruction value of the sound image position “left side of the player”. Is output. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to feel that only the normal volume telephone voice is heard from the left side.

  In step S494, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B determines whether the switching condition has been satisfied. The switching condition is satisfied when the third stop operation is detected, as described above. If the switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S495; otherwise, the process returns to step S493.

  In step S495, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B sets the designated value of the sound image position to “right side of the player”.

  In step S496, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B executes a second sound reproduction process. As described above, the second audio reproduction process changes the volume of the sound data related to the telephone voice associated with the command number “541B” to the mute volume (instruction value = “0”), and changes the command number “542B”. This is a process of changing the volume of the sound data relating to the normal voice associated with the normal voice to the normal volume (instruction value = “255”), and continuing the respective reproductions. In this case, the synthesized sound data of the sound data related to the telephone voice and the sound data related to the normal voice is transmitted from the speakers 64L and 64R so as to be heard from the right side of the player according to the instruction value of the sound image position “right side of the player”. Is output. As a result, the player can easily feel that only the normal voice having the normal volume can be heard from the right side. Note that the second audio reproduction process may be realized in a mode involving fade-in and fade-out as in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 33).

  In step S497, the first sound effect processing unit 1500B determines whether a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S496. In this way, the second sound reproduction processing is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  According to the present embodiment, effects similar to those of the above-described first embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the present embodiment, the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied, the first audio reproduction process is executed based on one combination of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file, When the switching condition is satisfied, the second audio reproduction process is executed based on the same combination of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file. This makes it possible to cope with a change in the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied, without having to prepare a plurality of combinations of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the normal voice and the telephone voice are output so as to have different sound image positions, the player can more intuitively understand the switching between the normal voice and the telephone voice. The effect can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the normal voice file and the telephone voice file are different sound data, but in a modified example, the normal voice file and the telephone voice file may be the same. Even in this case, since the normal voice and the telephone voice are heard in different directions by the player, they can be heard in different modes, and it is possible to realize an effect (switching scenes) without a sense of incongruity. In a similar modification, one of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file, for example, the command number “542B” related to CH6 may be omitted. In this case, only the volume “255” is associated with the command number “541B”, and the instruction of the sound image position is changed according to the satisfaction of the switching condition. Specifically, the sound image position is indicated on the left side of the player until the switching condition is satisfied, but the sound image position is indicated on the right side of the player when the switching condition is satisfied. With this configuration, the same effect can be obtained.

  In this embodiment, the control of the sound image position is added based on the first embodiment described above. However, the control of the sound image position may be added based on the second embodiment. That is, in the sound data table shown in FIG. 43 as well, the command numbers “541” and “542” may be replaced with the command numbers “541B” and “542B”, and the sound image position may be associated with each command number. .

[Fourth Embodiment of Effect Processing]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the effect processing will be described. The fourth embodiment of the effect processing is different from the first embodiment of the effect processing described above in that the DSP 1571 generates sound data of the telephone voice by processing sound data of the normal voice and then outputs the sound data. In the following, mainly different parts from the first embodiment of the above-described effect processing will be described. In the fourth embodiment of the effect processing, the animation data table shown in FIG. 28A is used.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound data table suitable for use in the present embodiment. The sound data table is a table that is referred to when realizing a sound effect corresponding to various effect contents.

  The sound data table shown in FIG. 50 differs from the sound data table shown in FIG. 27 in that the command number “541” is replaced with the command number “541C”, and the processing content is associated with the command number “541C”. The points are different.

  The sound data associated with the command number “541C” is exactly the same as the above-described sound data associated with the command number “542”. That is, as shown in FIG. 50, the file names associated with the command numbers “541C” and “542” are both “normal voice files”.

  The command number “541C” is associated with the processing content that defines the content of the processing. In FIG. 50, the command number “541C” is associated with the processing content “processing from normal voice to telephone voice”.

  FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a function related to the rendering process according to the fourth embodiment. The function related to the effect processing according to the fourth embodiment is different from the function related to the effect processing according to the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 29) in that the first sound effect processing unit 1500 has a first sound effect processing unit 1500C. Is different. The second sound effect processing unit 1502, the first image effect processing unit 1504, and the second image effect processing unit 1506 may be the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500C functions when executing processing relating to a combination of specific command numbers associated with the switching condition. In the present embodiment, the specific command number combination is a combination of the command number “541C” and the command number “542” shown in FIG. Note that the combination of specific command numbers is not limited to one, and a plurality of combinations may exist.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500C associates sound data to be processed into a telephone voice (sound data relating to a normal voice) with a command number “541C” in CH5 (an example of a first channel). Two types of volumes, ie, a normal volume (an example of a first volume) and a mute volume (a volume = 0) (an example of a third volume) are selectively reproduced. The normal volume associated with the command number “541C” is the volume “255” as shown in FIG.

  Further, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C gives a processing instruction to the DSP 1571 so that the normal voice is processed into the telephone voice in CH5. The DSP 1571 processes sound data relating to the normal voice so that the normal voice is converted to a telephone voice, and outputs the processed sound data (an example of a first sound) from the speakers 64L and 64R as voice relating to the telephone voice. Let it. The contents of the processing in the DSP 1571 are prescribed in advance. Upon receiving a processing instruction, the DSP 1571 performs predetermined processing on the input sound data. The sound data processed by the processing may be the same as the sound data associated with the command number “541” according to the above-described first embodiment.

  The first sound effect processing unit 1500C converts the sound data (an example of the second sound) relating to the normal voice into two types of volumes associated with the command number “542” in CH6 (an example of the second channel). Playback is selectively performed at a certain normal volume (an example of a fourth volume) and a mute volume (a volume = 0) (an example of a second volume). The normal volume associated with the command number “542” is the volume “255” as shown in FIG.

  When the reproduction start condition is satisfied, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C outputs the sound data processed into the telephone voice at the normal volume and the sound data related to the normal voice at the mute volume through the speakers 64L and 64R. At the same time, processing for starting reproduction (hereinafter, referred to as "first audio reproduction processing accompanied by a processing instruction") is performed. In the modified example, in the first audio reproduction process, sound data relating to a normal voice may be reproduced at a small volume (a volume significantly smaller than the volume “255”) instead of the mute volume.

  When the switching condition is satisfied during the first sound reproduction process, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C reduces the volume of the sound data processed into the telephone voice from the normal volume to the mute volume, and outputs the sound related to the normal voice. A process of increasing the data volume from the mute volume to the normal volume and continuing reproduction (second audio reproduction process) is executed. In the modification, in the second audio reproduction process, the sound data processed into the telephone voice may be reproduced at a small volume (a volume significantly smaller than the volume “255”) instead of the mute volume. . In another modification, the second sound reproduction process may stop reproduction of sound data related to the telephone voice. Further, in still another modified example, in the second audio reproduction processing, the processing for processing into a telephone voice may be omitted. This is because the sound data from CH5 is output at a mute volume, so that any sound data does not affect the sound heard by the player.

  Next, the audio output processing executed by the first sound effect processing unit 1500C will be further described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic flowchart of an example of the sound effect processing realized by the first sound effect processing unit 1500C in CH6. The process shown in FIG. 52 is executed when the sound data corresponding to the command numbers “541C” and “542” has been registered in S6 of FIG.

  In step S520, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C determines whether or not the reproduction start conditions related to the command numbers “541C” and “542” are satisfied. The playback start conditions for the command numbers “541C” and “542” are the same, and are “start switch on”. If the playback start conditions related to the command numbers “541C” and “542” are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S522; otherwise, the process waits for satisfaction of the playback start conditions.

  In step S522, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C executes a first sound reproduction process accompanied by a processing instruction. As described above, the first sound reproduction process accompanied by the processing instruction is performed by processing sound data relating to the normal voice associated with the command number “541C” into sound data relating to the telephone voice, and then processing the normal volume (instruction value). = "255"), and the sound data relating to the normal voice associated with the command number "542" is reproduced substantially simultaneously at a mute volume (instruction value = "0"). In this case, synthesized sound data of the processed sound data (sound data of telephone voice) and sound data of normal voice is output from the speakers 64L and 64R. As a result, the player hears only the normal volume telephone voice.

  In step S524, first sound effect processing section 1500C determines whether or not the switching condition has been satisfied. The switching condition is satisfied when the third stop operation is detected, as described above. If the switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S526; otherwise, the process returns to step S522.

  In step S526, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C executes a second sound reproduction process. As described above, the second audio reproduction process changes the volume of the sound data (processed sound data) associated with the command number “541C” to the mute volume (instruction value = “0”), and This is a process of changing the volume of the sound data relating to the normal voice associated with “542” to the normal volume (instruction value = “255”), and continuing the respective reproductions. In this case, synthesized sound data of the processed sound data (sound data of telephone voice) and sound data of normal voice is output from the speakers 64L and 64R. As a result, the player hears only the normal voice of the normal volume. Note that the second audio reproduction process may be realized in a mode involving fade-in and fade-out as in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 33).

  In step S528, the first sound effect processing unit 1500C determines whether a predetermined end condition has been satisfied. The predetermined termination condition is as described above. If the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the process ends. Otherwise, the process returns to step S526. In this way, the second sound reproduction processing is continued until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  According to the present embodiment, effects similar to those of the above-described first embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the present embodiment, the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied is equal to the time when the first audio reproduction process is executed based on the normal voice file. A second audio reproduction process is performed based on the file. This makes it possible to cope with a change in the time ΔT1 from when the reproduction start condition is satisfied to when the switching condition is satisfied, without having to prepare a plurality of combinations of the normal voice file and the telephone voice file.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, CH5 and CH6 are used, but in a modification, for example, the command number “542” relating to CH6 may be omitted. In this case, only the volume “255” is associated with the command number “541C”, and the presence or absence of the processing instruction is changed according to the satisfaction of the switching condition. Specifically, the processing from the normal voice to the telephone voice is realized based on the processing instruction until the switching condition is satisfied. However, when the switching condition is satisfied, the processing instruction is not transmitted and the normal voice is output as it is. With this configuration, the same effect can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, sound data relating to the normal voice is prepared and processed into sound data relating to the telephone voice according to the processing instruction. However, the reverse is also possible. That is, sound data related to a telephone voice may be prepared and processed into sound data related to a normal voice according to a processing instruction.

  In the present embodiment, processing instruction control is added based on the above-described first embodiment, but processing instruction control may be added based on the above-described second embodiment. That is, also in the sound data table shown in FIG. 43, the command number “541” may be replaced with the command number “541C”, and the processing content may be associated with the command number “541C”.

<Various modifications>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine of one embodiment according to the present invention have been described above, including the operational effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and includes various other embodiments and modifications without departing from the spirit of the present invention described in the claims.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected (for example, see FIG. 24), the virtual projection imaging method (video The example in which the technique of generating the PJ-compatible image data by the light virtual projection process and the virtual shooting process is applied has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, PJ-compatible image data may be generated in the following procedure.

  First, the virtual object of each projected member is decomposed into a composite virtual object. Next, virtual projection image data of the resource image is executed for each of the decomposed virtual objects in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment to create virtual projection image data. Note that the synthetic virtual object is a specific example of the first virtual object according to the present invention, and the virtual object of each projected member is a specific example of the second virtual object according to the present invention. Things. Further, the virtual captured image data of each projected member indicates a specific example of data of the first viewpoint image according to the present invention.

  Next, virtual projection image data of each virtual object is synthesized. Next, virtual shooting processing (viewpoint change processing) is performed on the synthesized virtual projection image data to create virtual shooting image data in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the virtual shooting image data is stored in a frame of the VRAM 154. Store in buffer. Then, image transfer (copy) processing is performed on the virtual photographed image data stored in the frame buffer in the same manner as in the above embodiment, to generate PJ-compatible image data. The synthesized virtual projection image data indicates a specific example of the data of the synthesized image according to the present invention.

  Here, an example of the method of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram for describing an outline of a method of generating PJ-compatible image data in the first modification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, as the plurality of projection target members to be projected, the trapezoid member 302 described in the above embodiment and a pair of columnar projection members 501 and 502 (hereinafter, “a pair of columnar members 501”) , 502 ") and an elliptical spherical projected member 503 (hereinafter, referred to as an" elliptical spherical member 503 ") will be described (see a projection object in FIG. 53). Further, in this example, a pair of columnar members 501 and 502 are arranged on the front surface (player side) of the trapezoidal member 302, and an elliptical sphere member 503 is disposed on the front surface (player side) of the pair of columnar members 501 and 502. An example of the arrangement will be described. Further, each of the pair of columnar members 501 and 502 is a movable projection member that can be rotationally driven with the central axis in the extending direction of each columnar member as a rotation axis. Each of the columnar members 501 and 502 and the elliptical spherical member 503 also shows a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention.

  In the method of generating PJ-compatible image data of this example, first, a virtual object (composite virtual object) of a projection object is combined with a virtual object A of a trapezoidal member 302 and a pair of columnar projected members 501 and 501 in a virtual space. The virtual object B is divided into a virtual object B 502 and a virtual object C of the projected member 503 having an elliptical spherical shape. Next, the virtual image light of the resource image is virtually projected onto each of the decomposed virtual objects from the direction of the player's eyes, and the virtual projection of each virtual object in which the respective virtual object data and the resource image data are synthesized. Generate image data.

  Next, the generated virtual projection image data of each virtual object is synthesized. At this time, virtual projection image data of a plurality of virtual objects is synthesized in consideration of the arrangement relationship of each virtual object. Specifically, in an area where a plurality of virtual objects overlap in the virtual space, a plurality of virtual projections are displayed so that an image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object located on the foreground (most player side) is displayed. Image data is synthesized. As a result, virtual projection image data after synthesis shown in the lowermost part in FIG. 53 (hereinafter, referred to as “synthesis virtual projection image data”) is generated. Then, similarly to the above embodiment, the composite virtual projection image data is converted into virtual captured image data, and PJ-compatible image data is generated based on the virtual captured image data.

  When the method of generating PJ-compatible image data of this example described above is used, even if there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected and a three-dimensional screen is configured by the plurality of projection target members, the projection member It is possible to generate virtual captured image data for each virtual object, synthesize the generated plurality of virtual projection image data, and generate synthesized virtual projection image data of a stereoscopic screen including a plurality of projection target members. Therefore, when the PJ-compatible image data is created by the method of this example, the deviation of the projected position of the image from the ideal position when the actual image light is projected onto the three-dimensional screen including a plurality of projected members is minimized. Can be minimized. That is, in the method of this example, deviation of a projected image with respect to a three-dimensional screen (object) including a plurality of projected members can be suppressed to a minimum.

  Also in this example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the projector 213 actually projects the image light on the projection target member, the projection image data is associated with the shape of the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member. Since the correction process is not required, it is possible to execute a high-quality, versatile video display effect utilizing the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in cost associated with CG creation.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the virtual projection processing and the virtual shooting processing of the image in the virtual space, the double view angle data obtained by adding the dummy image having the same size as the image above the projection target image is processed (calculated). Used as data. Then, when generating the PJ-compatible image data, the image data of the area where the virtual photographed image data is stored in the double view angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 is defined as the PJ-compatible image data. A method of copying to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 was used. However, the method of converting the double angle of view data to the PJ corresponding image data (the method of extracting the PJ corresponding image data from the double angle of view data) is not limited to the example of the above embodiment.

  For example, a process of extracting the virtual captured image data from the double angle of view data before expanding the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data generated by the virtual captured image processing in the virtual space into the frame buffer (FB) May be provided. In the second modified example, as an example, an example will be described in which projection conversion processing is performed on the double angle-of-view data including virtual captured image data to extract virtual captured image data from the double angle-of-view data.

  In the three-dimensional CG technology, the projective transformation process is usually an arithmetic process used when projecting a virtual three-dimensional object arranged in a virtual space onto a screen. First, a general projective transformation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 54A and 27B.

  FIG. 54A shows a rectangular object arranged at a predetermined position (“near” in FIG. 54A) on the projector side (light source side) enlarged and projected to a screen arrangement position (“far” in FIG. 54A). It is a figure showing a situation when doing. In FIG. 54B, the coordinates of the rectangular object arranged at “near” in FIG. 54A are converted into the coordinates of the rectangular object when projected on the screen (“far” in FIG. 54A). Is a diagram showing a projection matrix P (projection transformation matrix) used for this.

  Note that the projection matrix P is a square matrix of 4 rows and 4 columns. In the projection matrix P, the value of the [1 (row), 1 (column)] component is “x”, the value of the [2, 2] component is “y”, and the value of the [3, 1] component is “A”, the value of the [3,2] component is “b”, the value of the [3,3] component is “c”, and the value of the [3,4] component is “−1”. Yes, and the value of the [4, 3] component is “d”. The values of the other components are “0”.

  The values (x, y, a, b, c, d) of each component in the projection matrix P are, as shown in FIGS. 54A and 27B, the position of the rectangular object “near” and the position of the screen “far”. ", Parameters" top "and" bottom "that prescribe the coordinates in the height (vertical) direction of the rectangular object before projection (before projective transformation), and the coordinates in the width (horizontal) direction of the rectangular object before projection "Left" and "right" defining the height, the height (height) "height" and the width (width) "width" of the rectangular object after projection (projection transformation) in the height direction. Is calculated based on the viewing angle “fovy” (projection angle of view) of the light (projection light) emitted from the projector (light source) and the screen aspect ratio “aspect”.

  Then, when the coordinates of the rectangular object at the position “near” in FIG. 54A are multiplied by the projection matrix P in FIG. 54B (by performing coordinate transformation using the projection matrix P), the coordinates on the screen (the position “far” in FIG. 54A) are obtained. )), The coordinates of the rectangular object projected (enlarged and displayed) are calculated.

  In this example, the projection matrix P in FIG. 54B is modified and used to extract virtual captured image data from double field angle data including virtual captured image data. That is, in this example, the image data of twice the screen size (double view angle data) is converted into the image data of the screen size (actual size view angle data). The double field angle data used in this example is obtained by adding a dummy image having the same size as the image to the upper end of the image (projection target image) projected on the projection surface of the projection target member, as in the above embodiment. (See FIG. 23).

  FIG. 55 shows a projection matrix Pe used in this example to extract virtual captured image data (PJ-compatible image data) from double angle-of-view data including virtual captured image data. In this example, as shown in FIG. 55, a matrix obtained by multiplying the projection matrix P 'and the offset matrix O is used as the projection matrix Pe. Note that the projection matrix Pe indicates a specific example of a specific conversion parameter according to the present invention.

  The projection matrix P ′ is a square matrix of 4 rows and 4 columns, and is a projection transformation matrix in which the viewing angle (fovy) is set to （(predetermined angle) in the general projection matrix P shown in FIG. 54B. . In this example, as described above, the double angle-of-view data is converted to the same-size angle-of-view data, so that the viewing angle (projection angle of view) is set to a half value of that of the general projection matrix P. You. Further, the offset matrix O has values of [1 (row), 1 (column)] component, [2, 2] component, [3, 3] component, [4, 4] component, and [4, 2] component. It is composed of a square matrix of 4 rows and 4 columns, which is “1” and the values of the other components are “0”. Note that the projection matrix P 'shows one specific example of the predetermined projection conversion parameter according to the present invention, and the offset matrix O shows one specific example of the predetermined offset parameter according to the present invention.

  In this example, the coordinates of the double-size data are multiplied by the projection matrix Pe before the double-angle data including the virtual captured image data is developed in the frame buffer (FB). Thereby, only the virtual captured image data is extracted from the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data. In this specification, a specific example of the extraction result is not shown. However, in a verification experiment performed by the inventor, double-width data of a configuration to be processed in this example is multiplied by a projection matrix Pe shown in FIG. ), It is confirmed that the virtual photographed image data is extracted from the double angle of view data including the virtual photographed image data.

  According to the method of this example, the extracted virtual captured image data is developed in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, as in the above embodiment. Then, the virtual captured image data developed in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 is copied to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data.

  As described above, in this example, the size of the image data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) is half that of the above embodiment, so that the size of the frame buffer (FB) is also half that of the above embodiment. Can be Therefore, in this example, the same three-dimensional CG processing as in the above-described embodiment can be performed using a frame buffer (FB) having the same size as the screen size. , The processing efficiency of the GPU 153 can be improved.

  Also in this example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the projector 213 actually projects the image light on the projection target member, the projection image data is associated with the shape of the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member. Since the correction process is not required, it is possible to execute a high-quality, versatile video display effect utilizing the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in cost associated with CG creation.

  In the image data conversion processing of this example, a determinant (matrix operator) is used as a specific example of a specific conversion parameter, a predetermined projection conversion parameter, and a predetermined offset parameter according to the present invention, and an operation based on the determinant is performed. Has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image data before and after the conversion process (the pre-conversion data and the post-conversion data) may be prepared in advance, and a process of directly replacing the pre-conversion data with the post-conversion data according to a predetermined conversion command or the like may be performed. In this case, the predetermined conversion command or the like is a specific example of a specific conversion parameter, a predetermined projection conversion parameter, and a predetermined offset parameter.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the virtual projection imaging method is used as a method of creating PJ-compatible image data of video light actually projected from the projector 213 onto the projection target member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a technique called a texture mapping (projection mapping) method may be adopted as a technique for creating PJ-compatible image data.

  In Modification 3, a method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method will be described. The texture mapping method is a method of generating a three-dimensional image by virtually pasting a two-dimensional image on a three-dimensional object (model).

(1) Outline of Texture Mapping Method FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method. In the example shown in FIG. 56, an example is shown in which the projection target member to be projected is the trapezoidal member 302 (see FIG. 8). The same can be applied to the case of the 303 or the flat screen member 304.

  56, the image data of the area A in the resource image data is mapped on the projection surface 322a of the trapezoid member 302 (see FIG. 8), and the image data of the area B is mapped on the projection surface 321a of the trapezoid member 302. An example is shown in which the image data of C is mapped on the projection surface 323a of the trapezoid member 302, and the image data of the area D is mapped on the projection surface 324a of the trapezoid member 302.

  The resource image data used in this example can be configured similarly to that of the above embodiment. In this example, the image data to be processed in the process of creating the PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method is, as in the above embodiment, a dummy having the same size as the image at the upper end of the image to be projected. This is double view angle data to which an image is added.

  In the texture mapping method, each pixel data of the resource image data in the double angle-of-view data is converted into the texture data of the trapezoid member 302 corresponding to the coordinates of each pixel (the coordinate data of the resource image and the coordinates related to the structure of the trapezoid member 302). The image data (two-dimensional image data) after texture mapping is created by performing an operation of pasting the texture coordinates (UV coordinates) using the data. In FIG. 56, to simplify the description, only the pixel data of the coordinates of each vertex of the regions A to D in the resource image data is pasted on the coordinates (texture coordinates) of each vertex of the corresponding projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302. Shows how it is attached. Note that the texture data indicates a specific example of the texture information according to the present invention or information for displaying an image on the display unit. The image data after texture mapping is the pseudo three-dimensional image data according to the present invention. 1 shows a specific example.

  Note that the texture coordinates of the texture data are data generated (converted) from the three-dimensional CAD data of the trapezoidal member 302. Specifically, in the texture data, data (x1, y1) to (x8, y8) of each vertex coordinate of the region A to the region D of the resource image, and corresponding to each vertex coordinate of the region A to the region D. Vertex coordinates (x1 ', y1') to (x8 ', y8') in the virtual object data of the trapezoid member 302 are set. Then, in the mapping process, the GPU 153 converts each pixel data of each vertex coordinate ((x1, y1) to (x8, y8)) of the area A to the area D of the resource image into a corresponding object in the virtual object data of the trapezoidal member 302. (X1 ′, y1 ′) to (x8 ′, y8 ′). In this mapping process, the GPU 153 calculates the coordinates between the vertex coordinates in the virtual object data by linear interpolation based on the coordinate data (vertex coordinates) of the texture data, and calculates the coordinates of the coordinates other than the vertex coordinates of the resource image data. The pixel data is mapped to the corresponding coordinates in the virtual object data.

  Next, when the image data after the texture mapping is generated, the double view angle data including the image data is developed in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154. After that, of the double angle-of-view data expanded in the frame buffer (FB), the image data of the area where the texture-mapped image data to be projected is stored is set as the PJ-compatible image data, and the screen buffer of the VRAM 154 is used. SB).

  Note that the method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method is also applicable to, for example, the case where the projection target member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 described with reference to FIG. In this case, the resource image data is mapped to the synthesized texture data of the texture data of the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projected member) in operation and the texture data of the trapezoidal member 302, which are generated at the timing of the predetermined interval. Attached), PJ-compatible image data can be generated.

  Further, the method of creating the PJ-compatible image data of this example is also applicable to a case where the projection target to be projected is a three-dimensional screen including a plurality of projection targets, as shown in FIG. 53, for example. In this case, PJ-compatible image data is generated by acquiring composite texture data (texture data of a three-dimensional screen) of a plurality of projected members and mapping (pasting) resource image data to the composite texture data. be able to. In this case, similarly to the first modification, the composite texture data of the plurality of projected members is decomposed into the texture data of each projected member, and the resource image corresponding to the decomposed texture data of each projected member is generated. PJ-compatible image data may be generated by performing mapping and synthesizing the mapped image data of each projection target member.

(2) Procedure for Creating PJ-Compatible Image Data by Texture Mapping Method Next, with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process of generating PJ-compatible image data and a corresponding video signal by the texture mapping method.

  First, the sub CPU 151 selects resource image data to be displayed as an image this time from various resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (S21). The image data selected in the process of S21 is double field angle data in which a dummy image of the same size as the resource image is added to the upper end of the resource image. In this process, the GPU 153 (rendering processor 153) develops the selected resource image data in the VRAM 154 (rendering RAM) based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 selects the texture data of the target member to be projected this time from the texture data of the various target members stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (three-dimensional data relating to the structure of the target member). (S22). In this processing, when the projection target to be projected is one projection target, only the texture data of the projection target is selected. Also, in this processing, when there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected, the synthetic texture data corresponding to the current timing is selected. In this process, the GPU 153 develops the selected texture data in the VRAM 154 based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  In the processing of S21 and S22, the selected resource image data and texture data are developed in the VRAM 154 in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer and the screen buffer. The processing order of S21 and S22 is arbitrary, and the processing of S21 may be performed after the processing of S22.

  Next, the GPU 153 performs a texture mapping process (S23). In this process, using the resource image data selected in the process of S21 and the texture data of the projection target selected in the process of S22, each pixel data of the resource image is converted to the projection surface of the corresponding projection target. Perform processing (mapping) for pasting to the position.

  Next, the GPU 153 develops (sets) the double view angle data including the image data after the mapping process generated in S23 in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 (S24). Next, the GPU 153 stores an area (in FIG. 23, a lower half of the frame buffer in the frame buffer (FB)) in which the image data after the mapping process to be projected is stored in the double field angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB). The image data of the area is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data (S25).

  Then, the GPU 153 converts the PJ-compatible image data copied to the screen buffer (SB) in S25 into a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the projector 213 (S26). In this example, as described above, PJ-compatible image data (video signal) to be output to the projector 213 is generated.

(3) Various effects When the texture mapping method is adopted as a method of creating PJ-compatible image data as in this example, PJ-compatible image data can be created with simpler processing, and thus the cost associated with CG creation is reduced. A variety of effects with high image quality utilizing three-dimensional CG can be executed while suppressing an increase. Further, in this example, since the movie after projecting the image light on the projection target member can be prepared, the movie can be reproduced without any problem even if the processing performance of the GPU (Video Display Processor) is low. And texture mapping (projection mapping) can be used for general purposes.

  Further, also in this example, the image data to be processed in the process of creating the PJ-compatible image data is image data (double field angle data) obtained by adding a dummy image having the same size as the image to the upper part of the projection target image. . Therefore, also in this example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to suppress the distortion of the image actually projected on the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member at the stage of creating the image data, and to produce a high quality image. Images can be provided to the player.

  Note that the method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method is a process of simply pasting each pixel data of the resource image data to the coordinates of the texture data of the projected member corresponding to the coordinates of each pixel. This is a simpler method than the method using the virtual projection imaging method described in the embodiment. However, in the method using texture mapping, image distortion is more likely to occur near the boundary between the projection surfaces of the trapezoidal member 302 shown in FIG. From the viewpoint of image quality, the method using the virtual projection imaging method described in the above embodiment is superior.

  Further, in the examples described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, an example in which texture mapping processing is performed in real time using the GPU 153 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the following method is used. Is also good. First, image data in which a resource image is mapped to a projection target member in advance using a three-dimensional CG tool or the like is created, and the mapped image data is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Next, at the time of displaying an image, the sub CPU 151 selects predetermined image data from various mapped image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 and outputs the selected image data to the projector 213 as PJ-compatible image data.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, when generating the PJ-compatible image data, of the double view angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, Although the example in which the image data in the area where the image data is stored is copied to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as the PJ-compatible image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the method described in the second modification, the double view angle data including the image data of the projection target after the mapping process is multiplied (projection transformation) by the projection matrix Pe shown in FIG. Alternatively, image data (actual-magnification angle-of-view data) after mapping processing to be projected may be extracted from the double angle-of-view data. In this case, the extracted image data (actual-magnification field-of-view data) of the projection target after the mapping processing is expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, and the expanded equal-magnification field-of-view data is used as PJ-compatible image data. , Is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154.

[Other various modifications]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 is configured as a plane, and a white paint is applied to the projection surface. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a printing sheet may be attached to the projection surface 304b (second plane) of the flat screen member 304. In this case, for example, the print sheet may be divided into a plurality of areas, and different pictures and symbols may be formed in the respective areas. An image (image) that illuminates different pictures or symbols in a predetermined order may be displayed by the image light emitted from the projector 213. In this case, a so-called roulette effect in which one of the pictures (symbols) is selected can be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration example in which the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are moved has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The projection member according to the present invention is not limited to a member in which the entire projection member moves. For example, a movable member is provided in the projection member, and a part (movable portion) of the projection member moves. Is also good. In this case, by projecting the image light in accordance with the operation of the movable part, an image with a lively feeling can be displayed, and the interest of the effect using the image can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the display device 11 having the projector 213 is disposed at a position facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 inside the cabinet 2a, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, an opening may be provided in the waist panel 12, and a display device having a projector may be arranged at a position facing the opening of the waist panel 12 inside the cabinet 2a. Further, in the above embodiment, the example in which the display device 11 is disposed inside the cabinet 2a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a display device having a projector may be arranged on the front door 2b.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the image to be projected on the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, an image whose symbol fluctuates according to the operation (start operation) of the start lever 16 may be adopted. In this case, on the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, an image for stopping the changing symbol may be displayed in accordance with the pressing operation (stop operation) of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which a method (front projection) in which light from a projector is projected from a front surface side of a projection surface (screen) of a member to be projected to display an image (front projection) is adopted. The invention is not limited to this. For example, a method (rear projection) of displaying an image by projecting light from a projector from the back surface (rear surface) side of the screen may be adopted. In this case, an optimal effect can be obtained. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the display device, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a display device such as an organic / inorganic EL can be used instead of the projector.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachislot gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. There may be.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a continuous effect (for example, a look-ahead effect) may be performed for a plurality of symbol variations, but the variation time of each symbol depends on the state of the reserved ball, the special figure 1 and the special figure. It may change according to the difference between the two. For example, with respect to the telephone scene, if one symbol change relates to the listener's scene and the next symbol change relates to the speaker's scene, the length of the listener's scene may change. If the present invention is applied in such a case, the same effect as the above embodiment can be obtained. Specifically, during the fluctuations relating to the scene on the listener side, the sound data of the telephone voice is played back with the normal sound, and the sound data of the normal voice is started playing at almost the same time as the mute sound. After changing the sound data related to the voice to the mute sound and the sound data related to the normal voice to the normal sound, the reproduction is continued. In this case, the start of the next change (elapse of the effect time) satisfies the switching condition.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, the predetermined end condition relating to the output processing of the specific effect sound may be satisfied when the hit symbol is displayed at the end of the change of the symbol, or when the big hit start effect is started. . In this case, as in the case where the bonus is activated in the pachi-slot 1, it is not necessary to suggest the degree of expectation by the specific effect sound when the winning symbol is displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the sound data of the normal voice and the sound data of the telephone voice are started to be reproduced almost simultaneously, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the sound data 5802 for the normal voice may be started to be reproduced at a reproduction start timing t2 which is delayed by a certain time T7 from the reproduction start timing t1 of the sound data 5800 for the telephone voice. In this case, the fixed time T7 is set to be shorter than the minimum time (for example, the time T8 in FIG. 58) in a range from the start switch ON timing t1 to the third stop operation timing t3. Also, in this case, the sound data 5802 relating to the normal voice and the sound data 5800 relating to the telephone voice, when the reproduction is started from the reproduction start timing t2 and the reproduction start timing t1, respectively, the dialogue sound “Do you hear? Is generated such that "" substantially overlaps. For example, when the sound data 5800 relating to the telephone voice is generated by processing the original data (not shown) of the sound data relating to the normal voice, the sound data 5802 relating to the normal voice to be reproduced from the reproduction start timing t2. Is the original data of the sound data relating to the normal voice, in which the portion of the first fixed time T7 is deleted. According to such a modification, the same effect as in the above embodiment can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the switching condition associated with the command number “541” for the telephone voice and the command number “542” for the normal voice is “third stop operation”. The condition is not limited to this, and can be realized in various modes. For example, when using a switching condition associated with the detection of an operation on a production operation means, an operation validity period of the production operation means is set, and if an operation is detected during the operation validity time, the switching condition is set at that time. May be established. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the switching condition may be satisfied at the end of the operation valid period. Alternatively, if no operation is detected during the operation validity period, the switching condition may not be satisfied. In this case, the effect may be terminated without switching from the normal voice to the telephone voice (the effect may be terminated while the listener-side reproduction process is being executed). According to such a modification, the player can enjoy different effect patterns according to the operation timing.

  In the present modification, the operation mode of the effect operating means for satisfying the switching condition is not limited to the normal operation mode. The operation mode of the effect operating means for satisfying the switching condition may be various, and thereby various game characteristics may be realized. For example, the operation mode of the effect operating means for satisfying the switching condition may be a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, continuous hitting of a button or the like) or a continuous operation for a predetermined time or more (for example, a long press of a button or the like). ).

  Further, in the present modified example, as a production operation means, a production button, a touch panel, a proximity sensor (for example, an infrared sensor) capable of detecting approach of a player's hand, a lever, a jog dial, and the like can be appropriately adopted. Further, the effect operating means itself may be configured as a movable part, and the effect operating means may be movable by the player's operation only during the operation valid period. In this case, a button (one element of the effect operating means) may be further provided on the movable part.

[Other expandability of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player inserts medals (that is, inserts a medal in his hand into the medal insertion slot 14, or inserts a credited medal into the MAX bet button 15 a or 1 bet button 15 b). When the game is started by the operation of inputting and paying out medals, and when the game is over, if there is a payout of medals, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout opening 24, or Although the above description has been given of the form, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a player inputs a game medium required for a game, a game is performed based on the medium, and a privilege is provided (for example, a medal is paid out) based on a result of the game. be able to. In other words, the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself has the game medium held by the player as well as the form in which the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical player's operation and the game medium is paid out. May be managed electromagnetically to enable games without medals. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and managing the game medium. .

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is a device provided in the game machine, and is a two-way communication with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. The game media lending operation (that is, an operation of providing a necessary game medium when a player performs an operation of inserting a game medium) or a winning related to a payout of a game medium ( When the combination is established), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, the operation of acquiring the required game medium when paying out the game medium to the player) or the game medium to be used for the game is performed. What is necessary is just to be able to perform the operation of recording electromagnetically. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of held game media on the front of the pachislot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a function of allowing a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, the player has a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. It is desirable that the player has a performance that a player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless the player connects via the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (clearing) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for receiving electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on a game medium handling device side. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above-mentioned lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when ending the game, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on game media recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game media possessed by the player are transmitted. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalent may be discharged, or the storage medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game arcade can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

  Further, in a gaming machine or a game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a lock operation for locking game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed. Is also good. At this time, information that can be known only to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging unit provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  As described above, the game medium management device may be one that enables a game only without a medal, or a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's operation, May be paid out, and the game may be performed in a medalless manner. In this case, a system in which the game medium management device directly controls the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above can be adopted, and these can be controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method, and control for displaying and displaying the total is adopted. You can also.

  Also, in the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot 1 is described, but a game medium management device is similarly provided in a pachinko or enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball, and Game media can also be managed.

As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, and the like inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game. Not only can reduce the cost and production cost of the game machine, but also prevent the player from directly contacting the game media, thereby improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices to reduce the number of devices. Power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.
<Game control>
Next, game control applicable to the above-described pachislo 1 (an example of a gaming machine) will be described in detail.

  <Example 1>

(Function block)
FIG. 59 is a functional block diagram relating to game control according to the present embodiment.

  The game control according to the present embodiment is realized by the game control means 700. The game control means 700 is realized by the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 as described later.

  The game control means 700 includes an insertion receiving means 705, a random number generation means 710, an internal lottery means 720, a reel control means 730, a winning determination means 740, a payout control means 750, a replay processing means 760, a game state transition control means 770, and RT control. Means 773, effect control means 780, main lottery table storage means 791, lottery flag storage means 792, stop control table storage means 793, winning determination table storage means 794, and effect data storage means 797.

  Insertion receiving means 705, random number generating means 710, internal lottery means 720, reel control means 730, winning determination means 740, payout control means 750, replay processing means 760, game state transition control means 770, RT control means 773, main lottery table The storage unit 791, the lottery flag storage unit 792, the stop control table storage unit 793, and the winning determination table storage unit 794 are realized by the main control board 71.

  The effect control unit 780 and the effect data storage unit 797 are realized by the sub-control board 72.

  However, in the modification, one or both of the effect control unit 780 and the effect data storage unit 797 may be realized by the main control board 71 or may be realized by another board.

(Input receiving means)
The insertion accepting unit 705 accepts the insertion of medals for each game, and performs a game start operation on the start lever 16 (game start operation means) based on the insertion of medals corresponding to the specified insertion number (three). Perform the activation process. In the present embodiment, the first pressing operation of the start lever 16 activated based on the insertion of medals corresponding to the specified insertion number is accepted as a game start operation, and the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. This is an opportunity to start, and an opportunity to execute internal lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, the insertion accepting unit 705 sets the inserted medal to the inserted state, up to a specified insertion number. Further, in this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are depressed in a state where the medal is credited, the BET switch 77 is operated, and the insertion accepting means 705 sets the maximum number of insertions to the specified number. Then, the credited medals are set in the inserted state.

(Random number generation means)
The random number generation means 710 is a means for generating a random number value for lottery. The random number value can be generated, for example, based on a count value of an increment counter (a counter that counts a numerical value so as to circulate in a predetermined count range).

(Internal lottery table)
60 and 61 are explanatory diagrams of a plurality of internal lottery tables stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791.

  In this embodiment, seven types of internal lottery tables A to E as shown in FIGS. 60 to 61 are stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791. In each lottery table, for each of a plurality of random numbers (for example, 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535), various combinations such as a replay (an example of a first combination), a small combination, and a bonus are provided. Loss (unwinning) is associated.

  In this embodiment, a bell, a red special small combination, a blue special small combination, a white special small combination, a red cherry, and a black cherry are prepared as small combinations.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the replay is of two types, the normal replay and the fall replay, and the internal lottery table A and the internal lottery table B-1 have the same winning probability of the small combination and the replay, and the internal lottery. In the table C, the replay is not a lottery target, and the small win is won in a different mode from the internal lottery table A and the internal lottery table B-1.

  In the present embodiment, a first big bonus (BB1), a second big bonus (BB2), and a third bonus (RB1) are prepared as bonuses. BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are set as the lottery targets, but in the internal lottery tables B-1 to B-3 and the internal lottery table C, the first big bonus (RB1) is set. BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all excluded from the lottery targets. In the modification, only one of the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) may exist, or the third bonus (RB1) may be omitted.

  Specifically, the internal lottery table A includes a bell, a red special small role, a blue special small role, a white special small role, a red cherry, and a black cherry as the lottery targets, and a replay winning probability of about 1/7. .3, and the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all included in the lottery target.

  In the internal lottery table B-1, the bell, the red special role, the blue special role, the white special role, the red cherry, and the black cherry are included in the lottery target, and the replay winning probability is about 1 / 7.3. The first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all excluded from the lottery targets. The internal lottery table B-1 is a table in which the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) in the internal lottery table A are replaced with "losing". .

  In the internal lottery table B-2, the bell, red special small role, blue special small role, white special small role, red cherry, and black cherry are included in the lottery target, and the winning probability of replay is reduced to about 1 / 2.0. The first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all excluded from the lottery targets. In the lottery table B-2, the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) in the internal lottery table D are replaced with "losing".

  In the internal lottery table B-3, the bell, red special small role, blue special small role, white special small role, red cherry, and black cherry are included in the lottery target, and the winning probability of replay is reduced to about 1 / 2.0. It is set, and the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all excluded from the lottery target. In the lottery table B-3, the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) in the internal lottery table E are replaced with "losing". In addition, the lottery table B-3 includes two types of replays, a normal replay and a fall replay, and the winning probability of the fall replay is set to about 1 / 15.0. Note that the winning probability of the fall replay is not limited to about 1 / 15.0, but may be, for example, about 1 / 9.0 to 1/16 as long as the possibility that the RT2 state continues longer than the RT1 state is sufficiently low. Other probabilities in the range of .0 may be used.

  In the internal lottery table C, only the small combination bell is included in the lottery target. The internal lottery table C is for realizing the operation of the first-class special accessory as described later.

  In the internal lottery table D, the winning probability of replay is set to about 1 / 2.0, and the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all lottery targets. To be included.

  In the internal lottery table E, the winning probability of replay is set to about 1 / 2.0, and the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all lottery. Included in the subject. In addition, the lottery table E includes two types of replays, a normal replay and a fall replay, and the winning probability of the fall replay is set to about 1 / 15.0.

(Array of reel patterns)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of symbol arrangement on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, red 7 (symbol 91), "blue 7 (symbol 92)", and "bell (symbol 93)" are applied to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. , “Yellow-green heart (design 94)”, “white 7 (design 95)”, “Replay (design 96)”, “red cherry (design 97)”, “black design (design 98)”, and “black cherry” (Symbol 99) "is arranged, and when symbols existing within four frames from the pressed detection position are drawn on the effective line, the symbols are arranged at an interval of four frames or less on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. The symbols can be displayed on the activated line regardless of the pressed detection position.

  “White 7” is a symbol that is not directly related to the winning combination. In other words, even when “White 7” is displayed along one of the display lines, benefits such as payout of medals, automatic insertion of medals (replay processing), and transition of a game state described later are given to the player. It will not be done. The “red cherry” and the “black cherry” are stopped and displayed in a predetermined change display section (for example, the left display window 4), so that a predetermined role (a small role of the red cherry, a small role of the black cherry) is obtained. Is a symbol for which the establishment of is established. The first big bonus (BB1) is "red 7-red 7-red 7", and the second big bonus (BB2) is "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7". Holds.

(Internal lottery means)
Returning to FIG. 59, the internal lottery means 720 will be described. The internal lottery means 720 is a means for performing internal lottery for determining the winning or losing of a combination based on a start signal from a start switch 79 operated by the player by a game start operation on the start lever 16, and a lottery table selection process. A random number determination process, a lottery flag setting process, and the like are performed.

  In the lottery table selection process, it is determined which of the plurality of internal lottery tables stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791 is to be used to perform the internal lottery. In this embodiment, seven types of internal lottery tables A to E as shown in FIGS. 60 to 61 are stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791.

  In this embodiment, the normal state, the BB1 established state, the BB2 established state, the RB1 established state, the BB1 state, the BB2 state, and the RB1 state can be set as the gaming state. In the lottery table selection process, the gaming state and the RT state are set. One of the internal lottery tables A to E is selected as an internal lottery table used in the internal lottery according to (described later). In the following, the BB1 established state, the BB2 established state, and the RB1 established state are collectively referred to as an “internal established state (inter-flag state)”.

(Lottery table selection processing)
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of conditions for the lottery table selection process.

  FIG. 63 defines selection conditions (conditions when the internal lottery table is selected) in association with each of the internal lottery tables A to E.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the gaming state is the normal state, among the internal lottery tables A to E shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the replay winning probability is set to about 1 / 7.3. In addition, the internal lottery is performed by referring to the internal lottery tables A, D, and E in which the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) are all set as the lottery targets. Will be

  Specifically, when the game state is the normal state and the RT state is the non-RT state, the internal lottery table A is selected. When the game state is the normal state and the RT state is the RT1 state, the internal lottery table D is selected. Is selected, and when the gaming state is the normal state and the RT state is the RT2 state, the internal lottery table E is selected.

  When the gaming state is the internally established state and the RT state is the non-RT state, the internal lottery table B-1 is selected. When the gaming state is the internally established state and the RT state is the RT1 state, the internal lottery table B-1 is selected. When B-2 is selected and the gaming state is the internally established state and the RT state is the RT2 state, the internal lottery table B-3 is selected.

  When the game state is any of the BB1, BB2, and RB1 states, the internal lottery table C is selected.

  Here, the internal lottery tables D and E, which are referred to when staying in the RT1 state and the RT2 state, are set so that the payout rate is slightly larger than “100%”. For example, the internal lottery tables D and E that are referred to when staying in the RT1 state and the RT2 state are set so that the inclination value is slightly larger than “0”. The inclination value is a net increase in the number of medals per game when it is assumed that the small win with the maximum payout is always acquired for the winning small win.

  In the internal lottery tables D and E which are referred to when the user stays in the RT1 state and the RT2 state, even if the correspondence between the combination and the random number value is set so that the result of the internal lottery will not be lost. Good.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery tables D and E, which are referred to when the user stays in the RT1 state and the RT2 state, the replay winning probability is set to the same value of about 1 / 2.0. On the other hand, it may be slightly different.

(Random number judgment processing)
In the random number determination process, based on a start signal from the start switch 79, a random number value (lottery random number) is obtained from the random number generation unit 710 for each game, and the obtained random number value is stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791. It is determined whether or not a winning combination has been won by referring to the internal lottery table.

(Lottery flag setting processing)
In the lottery flag setting process, the lottery flag corresponding to the winning combination determined from the random number determination process is set from the non-winning state (off state) to the winning state (on state). The setting information of the lottery flag is stored in the lottery flag storage unit 792.

  Further, in this embodiment, a lottery flag (carry-over possible flag) that can carry over the winning state to the next and subsequent games until a prize is won, and a non-winning state without carrying over the winning state to the next and subsequent games irrespective of winning. And a lottery flag (non-carryover impossible flag) that is reset to. There are bonuses (first big bonus (BB1), second big bonus (BB2), and third bonus (RB1)) as the roles associated with the carryover possible flag, and the small role and replay are associated with the carryover impossible flag. Have been. That is, in the lottery flag setting process, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, a process of carrying over the winning state of the lottery flag of the won bonus until the bonus is won. At this time, the internal lottery means 720 also performs the internal lottery for determining whether or not to win the small combination and the replay even in the game in which the winning state of the bonus lottery flag is carried over. In other words, in the lottery flag setting process, in a game in which the winning state of the bonus lottery flag is carried over, if a small combination or replay is won, the bonus lottery flag of the bonus already won and the small combination won by the internal lottery are won. And a lottery flag corresponding to two or more types of replay lottery flags are set to a winning state.

(Reel control means)
Returning to FIG. 59, the reel control means 730 will be described. The reel control means 730 starts rotation driving of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a stepping motor based on a start signal from a start switch 79 which is operated by the player operating the start lever 16 to start a game. The stop operation by depressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels in which the 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating at a predetermined speed (about 80 rpm: about 80 rotations per minute) is enabled. And a control to stop each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R that are rotationally driven by the stepping motor in a mode according to the setting state of the lottery flag (internal lottery result).

  Then, in a state where the stop operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is enabled, the reel control unit 730 activates the stop switch 240 when the player presses the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R to activate the stop switch 240. Based on the reel stop signal from 240, the supply of the drive pulse (motor drive signal) to the stepping motor is stopped, so that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped (reel stop processing).

  That is, each time one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed, the reel control unit 730 determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the pressed button among the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, Control is performed to stop the reel at the determined stop position. In this embodiment, pressing the stop button 17L corresponds to an operation for stopping the reel 3L, pressing the stop button 17C corresponds to an operation for stopping the reel 3C, and the stop button 17R. Pressing corresponds to an operation for stopping the reel 3R. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R changes, the stopping order of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the spinning reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped within 190 ms from the time when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed. Has become. When stopping the spinning reel within 190 ms from the time when the stop button is pressed, the stop position of each spinning reel is determined to be 0 frames from the time when the stop button is pressed until the reel stops. It is determined in a range of up to four frames (predetermined pull-in range). Then, the reel control unit 730 determines that the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button of the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R that has been pressed. When the stop button is pressed and the display position on the activated line is within the range of 0 to 4 frames, the symbol corresponding to the combination whose lottery flag is set to the winning state is Control is performed to stop the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button on which the pressing operation has been performed so that the reel is displayed at the display position on the activated line. In the present embodiment, the effective line is formed by the middle stage of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Further, the reel control unit 730 performs a reel stop process with reference to the stop control table stored in the stop control table storage unit 793. In addition, instead of or in addition to the reference to the stop control table, a reel stop process by a logic operation may be realized.

  Note that the stop control table may be, for example, various tables as disclosed in FIGS. 17 to 26 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-102961. Is adapted according to the difference between the two.

  First, in the reel stop processing, five frames existing within the range of 0 to 4 frames from the pressed detection position which is the reel position at the time of operation of the stop switch 240 (at the time when the stop button is pressed) according to the stop control table. Among the candidates for the stop position of the minute (the number of sliding frames), the symbols constituting the winning combination with the highest priority are drawn on the activated line, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not along the activated line. The actual number of sliding frames is determined so as not to be displayed. Basically, the priorities are determined in the order of “replay> bonus” and “small win> bonus”.

(Winning determination table and winning determination means)
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of the winning determination table stored in the winning determination table storage unit 794.

  In the present embodiment, as the roles, the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), the third bonus (RB1), the replay, the small role of the bell, the small role of the red cherry, the small role of the black cherry, There is a red special role, a blue special role, and a white special role. Further, the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) are the accessory continuous operation devices related to the first kind special accessory. The third bonus (RB1) is a first-class special accessory.

  The winning determination means 740 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning combination has been won based on the stop mode of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Specifically, referring to the winning determination table stored in the winning determination table storage means 794, a symbol combination to be displayed on the activated line when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. Is in a predetermined winning combination. Then, as shown in FIG. 64, the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), the third bonus (RB1), and the like depending on the symbol combination displayed on the activated line when each reel is stopped. A winning determination table is prepared so that it is possible to determine whether or not various small wins such as replays and bells have won.

  Then, in the present embodiment, a prize-winning process is executed based on the determination result of the prize determining means 740. As the prize-winning processing, for example, when the small winning part wins, the payout control means 750 performs the medal payout control processing, and when the replay wins, the replay processing means 760 performs the replay processing. When a prize is won, a game state transition control unit 770 performs a game state transition control process for transitioning the game state.

(Payout control means and replay processing means)
Returning to FIG. 59, the payout control unit 750 and the replay processing unit 760 will be described.

  The payout control means 750 performs payout control processing related to payout of medals according to the game result. Specifically, when the small winning combination wins, the payout number of medals in the game is determined based on the payout predetermined for each winning combination, and the medal corresponding to the determined payout number is transmitted to the hopper device 51. Control to pay out.

  The hopper device 51 performs an operation of paying out medals of the payout number instructed by the payout control means 750. The hopper device 51 is provided with a payout medal detection switch 325 that is activated every time one medal is paid out, and the payout control means 750 transmits the medal from the hopper device 51 based on an input signal from the payout medal detection switch 325. The number of medals paid out can be managed.

  When credits for medals (internal storage) are permitted, instead of actually paying out medals by the hopper device 51, the number of credits (credits stored in a credit storage area (not shown)) is stored. The number of medals is added to the number of payouts, and credit addition processing is performed to virtually pay out medals.

  When the replay is won, the replay processing means 760 performs a replay process (re-game process) for setting the same preparation state as the previous game without having to insert a medal owned by the player for the next game. That is, in the present embodiment, when a replay is won, an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the previous game without using medals (including credit medals) held by the player is performed. Then, the next game start operation on the start lever 16 is awaited with the same activated line set as the previous game.

(Game state transition and game state transition control means)
FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram of transition of the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the game state transition control unit 770 transitions the game state among the normal state, the BB1 established state, the BB2 established state, the RB1 established state, the BB1 state, the BB2 state, and the RB1 state. Perform control processing. One condition or a plurality of conditions may be defined as the game state transition condition. When a plurality of conditions are determined, the game state is changed based on that one of the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied or that all of the plurality of predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to shift to another game state.

  The normal state is a game state corresponding to an initial state among a plurality of types of game states, and a transition from the normal state to a BB1 established state, BB2 established state, or RB1 established state is possible. Specifically, in the normal state, when the first big bonus (BB1) is won, the state shifts to a BB1 established state, and when the second big bonus (BB2) is won, the state shifts to a BB2 established state. When (RB1) is won, the state shifts to the RB1 established state.

  Note that the normal state is a gaming state in which a so-called “payout rate” (a gaming value given to a player with respect to a unit gaming value bet on a game) is smaller than 100%. In addition, this is a gaming state in which the carryover flag is off, and is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player compared to other gaming states.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state, there are a plurality of types of RT states, and depending on the RT state, the payout rate may be 100% or more in a gaming state. The winning probability may be other than about 1 / 7.3.

  The BB1 established state is a gaming state to which the game shifts when the first big bonus (BB1) is won by internal lottery.

  In the BB1 established state, the lottery flag corresponding to the first big bonus (BB1) is maintained in a winning state until the first big bonus (BB1) is won, and a symbol combination indicating a winning mode of the first big bonus (BB1) is set. Is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state transition control means 770 transitions the gaming state from the BB1 established state to the BB1 state.

  The BB2 established state is a gaming state in which the game shifts when the second big bonus (BB2) is won by internal lottery.

  Further, in the BB2 established state, the lottery flag corresponding to the second big bonus (BB2) is maintained in the winning state until the second big bonus (BB2) is won, and a symbol combination showing the winning form of the second big bonus (BB2) Is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state transition control means 770 transitions the gaming state from the BB2 established state to the BB2 state.

  The RB1 established state is a gaming state to which the game shifts when the third bonus (RB1) is won by internal lottery.

  Further, in the RB1 established state, the lottery flag corresponding to the third bonus (RB1) is maintained in the winning state until the third bonus (RB1) is won, and the symbol combination indicating the winning form of the third bonus (RB1) is an active line. When displayed above, the gaming state transition control means 770 transitions the gaming state from the RB1 established state to the RB1 state.

  The BB1 state is a gaming state in which a transition is made when a symbol combination indicating a winning form of the first big bonus (BB1) is displayed on the activated line. The BB1 state is a gaming state constituted by a game in which the "cassette activating device for the first type special prize" is operating.

  In the BB1 state, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied based on the total number of medals paid out in the game in the BB1 state, and medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 350) are paid out. Then, the gaming state transition control means 770 performs control to end the BB1 state and return the gaming state to the normal state.

  The BB2 state is a gaming state in which a transition is made when a symbol combination indicating a winning form of the second big bonus (BB2) is displayed on the activated line. The BB2 state is a gaming state constituted by a game in which the "cassette continuity actuation device according to the first kind special prize" is operating.

  In the BB2 state, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied based on the total number of medals paid out in the game in the BB2 state, and medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 250) are paid out. Then, the gaming state transition control means 770 performs control to end the BB2 state and return the gaming state to the normal state.

  The RB1 state is a gaming state in which a transition is made when a symbol combination indicating a winning form of the third bonus (RB1) is displayed on the activated line. The RB1 state is a gaming state configured by a game in which the “first-class special accessory” is operating.

  Also, in the RB1 state, if there are eight small wins, the gaming state transition control means 770 performs control to terminate the RB1 state and return the gaming state to the normal state.

(RT state transition and RT control means)
FIG. 65B is an explanatory diagram of transition of the RT state.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, the RT control unit 773 shifts the RT state between a non-RT state (non-replay time state), an RT1 state (first replay time state), and an RT2 state (second replay time state). An RT shift control process is performed. In the present embodiment, the lottery mode of the replay differs depending on the RT state, and specifically, the winning probability of the replay and the type of the replay to be randomly selected differ.

  The non-RT state is an RT state corresponding to an initial state among a plurality of types of RT states, and a transition from the RT2 state to the non-RT state is possible.

  The RT1 state is an RT state to which the system shifts when one of the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) is completed. The RT1 state can be changed to the RT2 state. Has become.

  Specifically, when one of the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) ends, the state is shifted to the RT1 state (the gaming state is the normal state), and the game of the specified number N1 is performed in the RT1 state. When the processing is completed, the state shifts to the RT2 state. The prescribed number N1 is fixed, and in the present embodiment, is “50” as an example.

  Note that, in the modified example, the RT1 state is an RT state that shifts when one of the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), and the third bonus (RB1) ends. Is also good.

  The RT2 state is an RT state in which a transition is made when the specified number N1 of games are ended after the end of the first big bonus (BB1) or the second big bonus (BB2), and is non-RT from the RT2 state. Transition to the state (fall) is possible. Specifically, when the game of the specified number N1 is completed after the end of the first big bonus (BB1) or the second big bonus (BB2), the game shifts to the RT2 state, and the falling replay winning form in the RT2 state. Is displayed on the activated line (that is, a win in the fall replay), the state shifts to the non-RT state (fall).

  In the present embodiment, the fall replay is a role that always wins when an internal lottery is won. When the fall replay is won, an auxiliary effect for avoiding a winning in the fall replay is not output to the display device 11. However, in a configuration in which the auxiliary effect is not output, the falling replay does not necessarily have to be a winning combination when the internal lottery is won, and may be a 2-selection combination or a 6-selection combination.

(Effect control means)
Returning to FIG. 59, the effect control unit 780 will be described. The effect control unit 780 performs control relating to a display effect performed using the display device 11 and a sound effect performed using the speaker group 84 based on the effect data stored in the effect data storage unit 797. For example, a lamp or LED is turned on or blinked in response to a medal insertion, an operation on the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b, a start lever 16, a stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, or a game event such as a change in a game state. By controlling the display, changing the display content of the liquid crystal display LCD, or outputting a sound from the speaker, the execution of the effect for exciting the game is controlled.

  Then, the effect control means 780 determines the effect content by lottery using the effect lottery table stored in the sub-lottery table storage means (not shown) according to the result of the internal lottery, and corresponds to the effect content. Based on the effect data to be performed, execution control of the display effect and the sound effect is performed.

  By the way, a section from the end of the first big bonus (BB1) or the second big bonus (BB2) to the end of the specified number N1 of games (hereinafter, referred to as “the specified section after BB”) (first game) In one example of a section), the gaming state may be an internally established state. That is, from the end of the first big bonus (BB1) or the second big bonus (BB2) to the end of the specified number N1 of games, the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) are internally drawn by lottery. Alternatively, the third bonus (RB1) may be won.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 780 determines whether the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), or the second big bonus (BB1) is to be performed in a game section (an example of a second game section) that starts after the end of the specified section after BB. An effect related to the internal lottery result related to the 3 bonus (RB1) is performed. That is, the effect control means 780 performs an effect indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not the current gaming state is an internally established state (hereinafter, also referred to as “internal state provoking effect”).

  Therefore, the effect control unit 780 performs the internal state provoking effect in the game section that is started when the RT state is shifted from the RT1 state to the RT2 state. That is, the effect control unit 780 starts the internal state stimulating effect with the start of the game section in which the RT state is the RT2 state.

  The internal state provoking effect is continuously executed from the transition of the RT state from the RT1 state to the RT2 state until the end of the specified number N2 of games. That is, the internal state provoking effect is continuously executed over a specified number N2 of game sections (hereinafter, referred to as “effect section”) after the RT state is shifted from the RT1 state to the RT2 state. The prescribed number N2, that is, the predetermined length of the production section may be constant, but is preferably variable. For example, the prescribed number N2 is variable within a range of 5 or more and 10 or less. This makes it possible to effectively increase the variation of the internal state provoking effect, as compared with the case where the specified number N2 is fixed, thereby improving interest.

  In addition, in a modified example, the effect control unit 780 may perform the internal state provoking effect in a game section (another example of the second game section) starting just before the end of the specified section after BB. Immediately before the end of the specified section after BB, a timing at which the internal state provoking effect does not become too long even if the internal state provoking effect continues until the first game of the game section starting after the end of the specified section after BB. For example, it may be about 5 games before the end of the prescribed section. However, in this case, the effect control unit 780 performs the internal state provoking effect on at least the first one game of the game section starting after the end of the specified section after BB. That is, the internal state provoking effect is not executed at the end of the specified section after BB, but is executed for the game section in which the RT state is the RT2 state.

  Even if the predetermined number N2 of games are not ended, the internal state provoking effect may be ended when the falling replay is won by internal lottery. That is, the production section may end based on the winning of the fall replay. Note that, in the modified example, the staging section may end equivalently based on the winning of the fall replay.

  For example, when the internal state provoking effect is a battle type effect, of the games of the specified number N2, the offense and defense up to the final game are unfolded. The internal state inducing effect may include an effect in which an enemy attacks or appears (hereinafter, referred to as “attack”), and the enemy initiating effect functions as an incentive to win a fall replay. At this time, if the game state is the normal state and the fall replay has been won, the effect of the enemy attacking ends with the scene in which the player is defeated by the enemy attack. In this case, the RT state shifts (falls) to the non-RT state, and the internal state provoking effect ends. On the other hand, if the game state is the internally established state and the fall replay has been won, the effect of the enemy attacking ends with the scene of evading the enemy's attack and countering the enemy and victory over the enemy. In this case, the production of the internal state is ended together with the production of the “bonus confirmation” in which the enemy is defeated. If the gaming state is the normal state and a role other than the fall replay (such as a normal replay) is won instead of the fall replay (or if it is lost), the effect of the enemy attacking will evade the enemy attack It ends with a scene or a scene that is attacked but rises. In this case, the RT state is maintained in the RT2 state, and the internal state provoking effect continues.

  Then, when the gaming state becomes an internally established state by the final game of the specified number N2 of games (including a case where the gaming state is internally established before the start of the specified number N2 of games), the final game is executed. If the enemy is defeated, a "bonus confirmation" effect is performed, and if the game state does not become an internally established state by the final game of the specified number of games N2, an enemy will be defeated in the final game, and the internal state will be promoted. Ends.

  Such an internal state provoking effect includes two elements of propelling a fall to a non-RT state and propelling a game state to an internally established state, thereby increasing interest.

  Note that, in the above-described modification in which the internal state-flicking effect is performed in the game section starting immediately before the end of the specified section after BB, the effect of the enemy attacking occurs after the end of the specified section after BB. It may be. In other words, the effect of the enemy attacking serves as a trigger for the winning of the fall replay, and may be generated only when the RT state is the RT2 state.

(Effects of the present embodiment)
Here, effects of the present embodiment will be described in comparison with some comparative examples.

  In Comparative Example 1, after the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) are completed, the RT state becomes the RT1 state by a fixed specified number (for example, 50), and the RT state is exceeded when the fixed specified number is exceeded. This is a specification to enter a non-RT state.

  In Comparative Example 2, after the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) are completed, the RT state is changed to a non-RT state. The replay winning probability is about 1 / 2.0), and in the high RT state, an auxiliary effect in a batting order (a so-called pushing order navigating effect) is performed so that a falling hand does not win.

  In Comparative Example 1, since the number of games in which the RT state is the RT1 state is a fixed specified number, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of enhancing interest. In the case of Comparative Example 2, the number of games in which the high RT state is substantially continued can be made variable depending on the manner in which the auxiliary effect is executed, which is advantageous from the viewpoint of improving interest.

  However, in the case of Comparative Example 2, since it is a specification that performs the batting order in the batting order so that the falling hand does not win, it is necessary to make the falling role a batting order capable of avoiding falling and to provide an auxiliary effect function (AT function). Yes, the band arrangement (arrangement of the symbols on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is likely to be restricted, and the auxiliary effect function must be realized in the advantageous section, and in relation to the advantageous section in which there is a limit to payouts. Restrictions arise. In addition, it is necessary to set an upper limit for the advantageous section, it is necessary to turn on a lamp or the like indicating that the user is staying in the advantageous section, and there is a restriction that a setting difference cannot be provided. This is disadvantageous in that a memory capacity for the main program is required.

  Furthermore, in the case of Comparative Example 2, if an auxiliary effect in the batting order occurs so that the falling hand does not win, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the gaming state is not the internally established state, so that the gaming state is the internally established state. For a player who expects (because there is no fall to the non-RT state in the internally established state), the auxiliary effect is a deterrent to the disadvantage. In addition, the player needs to perform an avoidance operation every time an auxiliary effect is generated, which may make the player feel troublesome.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the RT state becomes the RT1 state by the fixed specified number N1, but unlike the comparative example 1, the RT state becomes the RT2 state after the fixed specified number N1. The player can enjoy the RT state in which the winning probability of the replay is relatively high over a fixed specified number N1 + variable number of games. That is, the player can enjoy the game by adding the variable number of games while having a sense of security by guaranteeing the fixed specified number N1.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, unlike the comparative example 2, the fall replay, which is a fall combination, is designed to always win at the time of winning, and does not require an auxiliary effect, so that restrictions on the band arrangement can be reduced. Therefore, for example, it is possible to form a band arrangement that places importance on the appearance elements such as the reach eyes. Further, according to the present embodiment, the auxiliary effect function is not required (the auxiliary effect function is not required even in the specified section after BB), and the game section in which the RT state is the RT1 state or the RT2 state is within the advantageous section. Since there is no need to realize this, there is no influence from the payout limit related to the advantageous section. Further, since the present embodiment is applicable to a specification in which an advantageous section is not provided, it is possible to avoid the above-described inconvenience (for example, lighting of a lamp) caused by a specification in which an advantageous section is provided.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, unlike the comparative example 2, in the section of the fixed prescribed number N1 in which the RT state is the RT1 state, the falling replay is not won, so that the falling replay does not win. There is no need for an auxiliary production. Therefore, in the section of the fixed prescribed number N1 in which the RT state is the RT1 state, an inconvenience caused by the occurrence of the auxiliary effect for preventing the fall replay from winning is generated (that is, the auxiliary effect of the auxiliary effect as occurs in Comparative Example 2). Inconvenience that the occurrence may be a disadvantage of suggesting that the gaming state is not the internally established state) can be prevented. That is, the player can enjoy the game in the section of the fixed prescribed number N1 in which the RT state is the RT1 state, while having the expectation that the gaming state may be the internally established state.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the internal state provoking effect that starts after the RT state transitions to the RT2 state or starts immediately before the RT state transitions to the RT2 state causes the interest as described above. Can be increased. Note that when the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, a fall replay can be won. However, in the present embodiment, if the fall replay is won after the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, the internal state provoking effect is ended. It is possible to prevent the effects of the internal state from being continued even after the replay winning.

(Processing flow)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 67, a description will be given of a flow of processing relating to the above-described RT transition control and the internal state provoking effect.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic flowchart illustrating an example of the process related to the RT shift control described above. The processing shown in FIG. 66 is executed by, for example, the main control board 71.

  As shown in FIG. 66, when a game start operation is performed on the start lever 16 (Y in step S100), an internal lottery is performed (step S102), and a stop operation is performed on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R ( At step S104, a reel stop process corresponding to the operated stop button is performed (step S106). When a reel stop process corresponding to the third stop operation is executed (Y at step S108), a winning determination is made. The processing is performed (Step S110), and the payout control processing is performed (Step S112).

  When the BB1 state or the BB2 state ends in this game (Y in step S114), the RT state is set to the RT1 state (step S116).

  If the gaming state is the BB1, BB2, or RB1 state (Y in step S118), the game ends, and if the gaming state is not the BB1, BB2, or RB1 state (N in step S118), the fall replay is performed. Is determined (step S120). When the falling replay has won (Y in step S120), if the gaming state is the normal state (Y in step S121), the RT state is set to the non-RT state (step S122), and the gaming state is in the internally established state. If there is (N in step S121), the RT state ends without changing.

  If the fall replay has not been won (N in step S120), if the RT state is not the RT1 state (N in step S124), the process ends immediately. If the RT state is the RT1 state (Y in step S124), BB1 It is determined whether or not the game is the first game after the state or the BB2 state (step S126). When the game is the first game after the BB1 state or the BB2 state, that is, when the current game is a game that has shifted from the BB1 state or the BB2 state to the normal state (Y in step S126), the RT1 state counter C1 is set to “49”. This is set (step S128), and the process ends. If it is not the first game after the BB1 state or the BB2 state (N in step S126), the RT1 state counter C1 is decremented by “1” (step S130), and it is determined whether the RT1 state counter C1 is 0 (step S130). Step S132). If the RT1 state counter C1 is 0 (Y in step S132), the RT state is set to the RT2 state (step S134), and if the RT1 state counter C1 is not 0 (N in step S132), the process ends.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic flowchart illustrating an example of a process related to the above-described internal state provoking effect. The process shown in FIG. 67 is executed when the RT state is other than the non-RT state. The processing shown in FIG. 67 is executed by, for example, the sub-control board 72.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the game start operation is performed on the start lever 16 (Y in step S200), it is determined whether or not the game number counter C2 is “50” (step S202). The game number counter C2 is a counter that increases by “1” each time a game start operation on the start lever 16 is performed, with the end time of the BB1 state or the BB2 state as the number of games 0. When the game number counter C2 is "50" (Y in step S202), the specified number N2 is set to, for example, any one of 5 to 10 (step S204). The prescribed number N2 may be set using a table (not shown) showing the relationship between the random number value range and the respective numerical values of 5 to 10. In this case, for example, when the number-of-games counter C2 reaches “50”, a random number value is acquired, and based on the acquired random number value and the table, any one of 5 to 10 is set as the specified number N2. The value is set. In the modification, the specified number N2 may be determined before the game number counter C2 reaches “50” (for example, at the end of the BB1 state or the BB2 state).

  When the game number counter C2 is other than "50" (N in step S202), it is determined whether the game number counter C2 is smaller than "50" (step S206), and the game number counter C2 is smaller than "50". (Y in step S206), the process ends, and the game number counter C2 is equal to or greater than "50" (N in step S206. In this case, the game number counter C2 is equal to or greater than "51" in relation to step S202). ), It is determined whether or not the RT state is the RT2 state (step S208). If the RT state is the RT2 state (Y in step S208), it is determined whether or not a fall replay has been won (step S210).

  Then, when the falling replay is won (Y in step S210), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is an internally established state (step S212). When the gaming state is an internally established state (Y in step S212), the internal state is determined. The state provoking effect ends with an effect of “bonus confirmation” in which the enemy is defeated by a counterattack, after the effect of attacking the enemy (the effect of stimulating the winning of the fall replay) (step S214). If the game state is not the internal establishment state (N in step S212), the internal state provoking effect ends with the effect of the enemy winning after the effect of the enemy attacking (step S216).

  On the other hand, if the fall replay has not been won (N in step S210), it is determined whether or not the game number counter C2 is "50 + N2" (step S218).

  When the game number counter C2 is "50 + N2" (Y in step S218), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is an internally established state (step S220). When the gaming state is an internally established state (Y in step S220). ), The internal state provoking effect ends with an effect of “bonus confirmation” in which the enemy is defeated without going through the effect of attacking the enemy (for example, through the effect of attacking by allies) (step S222). If the game state is not the internal establishment state (N in step S220), the internal state-promoting effect is performed without the enemy attacking effect (for example, after the ally attacks), and the enemy wins (for example, the ally's victory effect). The effect is that the attack is countered by the enemy (step S224).

  If the game number counter C2 is not “50 + N2” (N in step S218), that is, if the game number counter C2 is less than “50 + N2”, the internal state provoking effect is continued with an effect indicating “continuation (NEXT)”. Is performed (step S226).

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, the internal state provoking effect ends when the number-of-games counter C2 reaches “50 + N2” without a fall replay being won, but is not limited thereto. For example, the internal state provoking effect may be continued until a fall replay is won.

  By the way, even in the case of transition from the RT2 state to the non-RT state, the transition to the non-RT state is not grasped by the player at that time unless otherwise notified, and the replay winning in the subsequent game is won. Only when the frequency increases does it reach the player. In consideration of this point, the internal state provoking effect may be continued even if the fall replay is won. For example, a predetermined number of games may be continued after the game in which the fall replay is won. The predetermined number of games is arbitrary, but may be a number that does not exceed the number of games enough for the player to recognize that the replay winning frequency has increased.

  Further, in a modified example in which the internal state provoking effect can be continued even after the falling replay is won, if the falling replay is won twice in succession, the game state is conversely given to the player in the internally established state. That is, the fact that the player has won the first big bonus (BB1), the second big bonus (BB2), or the third bonus (RB1) by the internal lottery in the RT2 state is transmitted. Therefore, if the internal state-inducing effect continues even in a game after the falling replay has been won twice in succession, the interest may be impaired. For this reason, in a modified example in which the internal state inducing effect can continue even after the falling replay is won, the internal state inducing effect may be ended when the falling replay is won twice in succession. The condition for ending the internal state provoking effect is not limited to the case where the falling replay is won twice consecutively, but may be the case where the falling replay is continuously won three or more times. , The number of wins or the winning frequency of the fall replay after the transition to the RT2 state may be equal to or more than a predetermined threshold.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67, the internal state stimulating effect is started when the game number counter C2 becomes “51”, but is not limited to this as described above. For example, the internal state provoking effect may be started when the game number counter C2 is, for example, between "45" and "50", and ended when the game number counter C2 is "51" or later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fall replay functions as a fall combination from the RT2 state to the non-RT state, but a predetermined small combination may function as a fall combination from the RT2 state to the non-RT state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT1 state is an RT state to which the transition is made when one of the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the RT1 state is an RT state that shifts when a symbol combination indicating a winning mode of either the first big bonus (BB1) or the second big bonus (BB2) is displayed on the activated line. Is also good. In this case as well, the RT1 state is maintained after one of the first big bonus (BB1) and the second big bonus (BB2) ends and the game of the specified number N1 ends.

  <Example 2>

(Function block)
FIG. 68 is a functional block diagram relating to game control according to the present embodiment.

  The game control according to the present embodiment is realized by the game control means 700A. The game control means 700A is realized by the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 as described later.

  The game control means 700A includes an insertion receiving means 705A, a random number generation means 710A, an internal lottery means 720A, a reel control means 730A, a winning determination means 740A, a payout control means 750A, a replay processing means 760A, a game state transition control means 770A, and an AT control. Means 775A, effect control means 780A, main lottery table storage means 791A, lottery flag storage means 792A, stop control table storage means 793A, winning determination table storage means 794A, and effect data storage means 797A.

  Insertion receiving means 705A, random number generating means 710A, internal lottery means 720A, reel control means 730A, winning determination means 740A, payout control means 750A, replay processing means 760A, game state transition control means 770A, AT control means 775A, main lottery table The storage unit 791A, the lottery flag storage unit 792A, the stop control table storage unit 793A, and the winning determination table storage unit 794A are realized by the main control board 71.

  The effect control unit 780A and the effect data storage unit 797A are realized by the sub control board 72.

  However, in the modification, one or both of the effect control unit 780A and the effect data storage unit 797A may be realized by the main control board 71 or may be realized by another board.

(Input receiving means)
The insertion accepting means 705A accepts the insertion of medals for each game, and performs a game start operation on the start lever 16 (game start operating means) based on the insertion of medals corresponding to the prescribed insertion number (three). Perform the activation process. In the present embodiment, the first pressing operation of the start lever 16 activated based on the insertion of medals corresponding to the specified insertion number is accepted as a game start operation, and the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. This is an opportunity to start, and an opportunity to execute internal lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, the insertion accepting unit 705A sets the inserted medal to the inserted state up to the specified insertion number. Further, in this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are depressed in a state where the medal is credited, the BET switch 77 is operated, and the insertion accepting means 705A sets the maximum number of insertions to the specified insertion number. Then, the credited medals are set in the inserted state.

(Random number generation means)
The random number generation means 710A is a means for generating a random number value for lottery. The random number value can be generated, for example, based on a count value of an increment counter (a counter that counts a numerical value so as to circulate in a predetermined count range).

(Internal lottery table)
FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of a plurality of internal lottery tables stored in the main lottery table storage means 791A.

  In this embodiment, three types of internal lottery tables (internal lottery table 1 to internal lottery table 3) as shown in FIG. 69 are stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791A. In each internal lottery table, various combinations such as replays, small combinations, and bonuses and losing (non-winning) correspond to a plurality of random numbers (for example, 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535). It is attached.

  In the present embodiment, small wins 1 to 17 are prepared as small wins, and the winning order of the small wins is batting order bell 1 to batting order 12, small win ALL, one win ALL, and cherry. Is set.

  In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table 1 and the internal lottery table 2 have the same winning probability of the small combination, but the internal lottery table 2 has a higher replay winning probability than the internal lottery table 1. In the internal lottery table 2, a winning area for a batting order replay is set.

  Further, in this embodiment, RBB is prepared as an accessory continuous actuating device for the first type special accessory, and in the internal lottery table 1, RBB is set as a lottery target, but in the internal lottery table 2, , RBB are excluded from the lottery targets.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery table 1, the size of the RBB winning area is 1300 (in the winning probability, 9000/65536 ≒ 1 / 7.28), and the size of the winning area of each batting order of the batting order bells 1 to 12. The size is 28816 as a whole, the size of the cherry winning area is 655, and the size of the replay winning area is 8978 (8978 / 65536７1 / 7.3 in winning probability).

  In the internal lottery table 2, the size of the winning area for the batting order bells 1 to 12 and the cherry, that is, the winning combination is the same as that of the internal lottery table 1, but the RBB winning area and the non-winning area (losing) of the internal lottery table 1 are set. ) Is shifted to the winning area of the batting order replay or the normal replay, and the size of the winning area of the replay is 36065 (36065/65536 in terms of winning probability) in total. Therefore, either the replay or the winning combination including the batting order is won with a high probability.

  The internal lottery table 2 is set so that the inclination value is significantly larger than “0” (for example, set to about “4”). The inclination value is a net increase in the number of medals per game when it is assumed that the small win with the maximum payout is always acquired for the winning small win.

  In the internal lottery table 3, the size of the replay winning area is 36064 (36064/65536 in terms of winning probability), and the size of the winning area of the small role ALL is 14400 (14400/65536 in winning probability). ), And the size of the winning area of the one-sheet winning ALL is 14400 (15072/65536 in terms of winning probability).

(Winning modes such as small roles)
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of a winning mode such as a small winning combination.

  With respect to the winning modes of the small wins, the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 12 have two to four types of one small win (small win with one payout) and one kind of 12 small wins (12 payouts). ), Which means that the winning is repeated.

  The small role ALL indicates that 17 types of small roles (one, six, and twelve small roles) are won in duplicate, and the single role ALL has thirteen types of small roles. Cherry indicates that a single small win with one payout is to be won, and Cherry indicates that one type of six small wins (small win with a payout of 6) is won alone. .

  In the present embodiment, replays 1 and 2 are prepared as replays, and a normal replay and a batting order replay are set as replay winning modes.

  Regarding the winning mode of each replay, the normal replay indicates that the replay 1 is won, and the batting order replay indicates that the replay 1 and the replay 2 are won in an overlapping manner.

(Array of reel patterns)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of symbol arrangement on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, various symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and symbols existing within four frames from the pressed detection position are displayed on the active line. In the case of drawing, symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface of each reel at intervals of four frames or less can be displayed on the activated line regardless of the pressed detection position.

(Such as batting order)
FIG. 72 is a view for explaining the relationship between the batting order (pressing order) of the batting order bell and the stop button of the batting order replay and the winning combination.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, as options, 12 types of batting order bells 1 to 12 and one type of batting order replay are prepared. Each of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 12 is associated with the correct batting order of the batting order 1 to 6. For example, for the batting order bell 1, the batting order 1 (“left → middle → right”) is associated as the correct batting order. In the batting order replay, replay 2 is won at the time of forward pressing (batting order 1 or batting order 2), and at the time of irregular pressing (batting order 3 to batting order 6), replay 1 is won.

(Internal lottery means)
Returning to FIG. 68, the internal lottery means 720A will be described. The internal lottery means 720A is a means for performing internal lottery for determining whether or not to win a combination based on a start signal from a start switch 79 that is operated by the player by a game start operation on the start lever 16, and includes a lottery table selection process; A random number determination process, a lottery flag setting process, and the like are performed.

  In the lottery table selection processing, it is determined which of the plurality of internal lottery tables 1 to 3 (see FIG. 69) stored in the main lottery table storage means 791A is to be used to perform the internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the normal state, the RBB established state, and the RBB state can be set as the game state. In the lottery table selection process, one of the internal lottery tables 1 to 3 is set according to the game state. Is selected as the internal lottery table used in the internal lottery.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the internal lottery table 1 of the internal lottery tables 1 to 3 (see FIG. 69) is selected, and when the gaming state is the RBB established state, the internal lottery table is set. When the internal lottery table 2 among the lottery tables 1 to 3 is selected and the gaming state is the RBB state, the internal lottery table 3 among the internal lottery tables 1 to 3 is selected.

(Random number judgment processing)
In the random number determination process, a random value (lottery random number) is obtained from the random number generator 710A for each game based on a start signal from the start switch 79, and the obtained random number is stored in the main lottery table storage 791A. It is determined whether or not a winning combination has been won by referring to the internal lottery table.

(Lottery flag setting processing)
In the lottery flag setting process, the lottery flag corresponding to the winning combination determined from the random number determination process is set from the non-winning state (off state) to the winning state (on state). In the present embodiment, when two or more types of winning combinations are won in duplicate, a lottery flag corresponding to each of the two or more types of winning combinations is set to a winning state. The setting information of the lottery flag is stored in the lottery flag storage unit 792A.

  Further, in this embodiment, a lottery flag (carry-over possible flag) that can carry over the winning state to the next and subsequent games until a prize is won, and a non-winning state without carrying over the winning state to the next and subsequent games irrespective of winning. And a lottery flag (non-carryover impossible flag) that is reset to. The role associated with the carryover flag is a bonus, and the small combination and replay are associated with the latter carryover impossible flag. That is, in the lottery flag setting process, for example, when an RBB is won by internal lottery, a process of carrying over the winning state of the RBB lottery flag until the RBB wins. At this time, the internal lottery means 720A also performs the internal lottery for determining whether to win the small win and the replay even in the game in which the winning state of the RBB lottery flag is carried over. That is, in the lottery flag setting process, in a game in which the winning state of the bonus lottery flag is carried over, if a small role or replay is won, the small lottery flag of the bonus already won and the internal lottery are won. A lottery flag corresponding to two or more types of winning combinations and a lottery flag for replay is set to a winning state.

(Reel control means)
Returning to FIG. 68, the reel control means 730A will be described. The reel control unit 730A starts the rotation driving of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a stepping motor based on a start signal from a start switch 79 which is operated by a player operating the start lever 16 to start a game. The stop operation by depressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels in which the 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating at a predetermined speed (about 80 rpm: about 80 rotations per minute) is enabled. And a control to stop each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R that are rotationally driven by the stepping motor in a mode according to the setting state of the lottery flag (internal lottery result).

  Then, when the player presses the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R in the state where the stop operation on the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is enabled, the reel control means 730A activates the stop switch 240. Based on the reel stop signal from 240, the supply of the drive pulse (motor drive signal) to the stepping motor is stopped to control the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop (reel stop processing). .

  That is, each time one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed, the reel control unit 730A determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the pressed button among the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, Control is performed to stop the reel at the determined stop position. In this embodiment, pressing the stop button 17L corresponds to an operation for stopping the reel 3L, pressing the stop button 17C corresponds to an operation for stopping the reel 3C, and the stop button 17R. Pressing corresponds to an operation for stopping the reel 3R. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R changes, the stopping order of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the spinning reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped within 190 ms from the time when the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed. Has become. When stopping the spinning reel within 190 ms from the time when the stop button is pressed, the stop position of each spinning reel is determined to be 0 frames from the time when the stop button is pressed until the reel stops. It is determined in a range of up to four frames (predetermined pull-in range). Then, the reel control unit 730A determines that the symbol corresponding to the winning combination by the internal lottery on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button of the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R that has been pressed. When the stop button is pressed and the display position on the activated line is within the range of 0 to 4 frames, the symbol corresponding to the combination whose lottery flag is set to the winning state is Control is performed to stop the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button on which the pressing operation has been performed so that the reel is displayed at the display position on the activated line. In the present embodiment, the effective line is formed by the middle stage of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Further, the reel control means 730A performs the reel stop processing with reference to the stop control table stored in the stop control table storage means 793A. In addition, instead of or in addition to the reference to the stop control table, a reel stop process by a logic operation may be realized.

  Note that the stop control table may be, for example, various tables as disclosed in FIGS. 17 to 26 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-102961. Is adapted according to the difference between the two.

  First, in the reel stop processing, five frames existing within the range of 0 to 4 frames from the pressed detection position which is the reel position at the time of operation of the stop switch 240 (at the time when the stop button is pressed) according to the stop control table. Among the candidates for the stop position of the minute (the number of sliding frames), the symbols constituting the winning combination with the highest priority are drawn on the activated line, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not along the activated line. The actual number of sliding frames is determined so as not to be displayed. Basically, the priorities are determined in the order of “replay> bonus” and “small win> bonus”.

  In addition, the priority order of the small wins is defined such that the higher the payout number of medals based on the predetermined payout for each small win, the higher the priority order becomes. However, it is stipulated that the small wins having the same payout have the same priority. As for the small win ALL, which is the winning mode of the small win where all the small wins are repeated, twelve small wins (small wins 1, 2, 3) in which the number of medals to be paid out with the prize are the largest are obtained. The priority order is defined so as to be preferentially drawn.

  In this embodiment, when the batting order bell is won, the combination to be drawn in with priority is determined according to the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. Specifically, a correct hit order is set for each of the hit order bell 1 to the hit order bell 12, and a pressing order different from the correct hit order is treated as an incorrect hit order. When any of the batting order bells is won, if the type of the stop button pressed first corresponds to the correct hit order and the type of the stop button pressed second corresponds to the correct hit order, It is determined that the hit order is correct. With respect to the order of correct answers, a priority order is defined so that the winning combination with the largest number of medals is drawn in with priority. Also, when one of the batting order bells is won, the type of the stop button pressed first does not correspond to the correct hit order, or the type of the stop button pressed first corresponds to the correct hit order. If the type of the stop button pressed second does not correspond to the correct hit order, it is determined that the order is incorrect. With respect to the order of incorrect hits, the priority order is defined so that the symbol combinations that constitute the most winning forms are drawn in preferentially at the stage of stopping the next reel.

  Then, in this embodiment, when any of the batting order bells is won, when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed in the correct batting order, the priority order of 12 small wins (small wins 1, 2, 3) is obtained. Is highest, and when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed in the order of incorrect answering, the priority of one small win (small win 4 to small win 16) becomes highest.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 12 is won, if the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed in the correct batting order, a 12 Wins, and if the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed in the order of incorrect answering, a so-called "missing" occurs when one of the small roles wins or when no small roles win. The case exists.

  In the case where the gaming state is the RBB established state, the winning of the small win is prioritized over the bonus. Therefore, if the batting order is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of correct answer, 12 small wins are won. However, even if the stop operation is performed in the order of the incorrect batting, the RBB winning is avoided when the symbols constituting the winning configuration of one small win are displayed on the activated line. Therefore, even if the batting order bell is won in the RBB established state, the winning of the small win is prioritized over the bonus, so that the 12 small wins win in the correct answer order and the 1 small win in the incorrect hit order. In some cases, there is a case where “missing” occurs without winning any of the roles.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the hitting order replay is won, if the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed in the correct answering order, the reel stop processing is executed so that Replay 2 wins, and the reels are stopped in the incorrect answering order. When the buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed, a reel stop process is executed so that Replay 1 wins. When the normal replay is won, a reel stop process is executed so that replay 1 wins regardless of the pressing order.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the hitting order replay is won, if the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed in the correct hitting order, the replay 2 wins and the stop button in the incorrect hitting order. When 17L, 17C and 17R are pressed, Replay 1 wins. When the normal replay is won, replay 1 wins regardless of the pressing order.

(Winning determination table and winning determination means)
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of the prize determination table stored in the prize determination table storage unit 794A.

  In the present embodiment, RBB, replay 1, replay 2, and small combinations 1 to 17 are provided as combinations. The RBB is an accessory continuous operation device according to the first class special accessory.

  The winning determination unit 740A performs a process of determining whether or not a winning combination has been achieved based on the stop mode of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Specifically, referring to the winning determination table stored in the winning determination table storage means 794A, a symbol combination to be displayed on the activated line when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. Is in a predetermined winning combination. Then, based on the symbol combination displayed on the activated line when each reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 73, it can be determined whether or not there is a winning of RBB, replay 1 to replay 2, and small combination 1 to small combination 17. Is provided with a winning determination table.

  Then, in the present embodiment, a prize-winning process is executed based on the determination result of the prize determining means 740A. As the prize-winning processing, for example, when the small role wins, the payout control means 750A performs the medal payout control processing, and when the replay wins, the replay processing means 760A performs the replay processing. When a prize is won, the game state transition control means 770A performs a game state transition control process of transitioning the game state.

(Payout control means and replay processing means)
Returning to FIG. 68, the payout control unit 750A and the replay processing unit 760A will be described.

  The payout control unit 750A performs a payout control process related to payout of medals according to a game result. Specifically, when the small winning combination wins, the payout number of medals in the game is determined based on the payout predetermined for each winning combination, and the medal corresponding to the determined payout number is transmitted to the hopper device 51. Control to pay out.

  The hopper device 51 performs an operation of paying out medals of the payout number instructed by the payout control means 750A. The hopper device 51 is provided with a payout medal detection switch 325 that is activated each time one medal is paid out, and the payout control means 750 </ b> A actually outputs the medal from the hopper device 51 based on an input signal from the payout medal detection switch 325. The number of medals paid out can be managed.

  When credits for medals (internal storage) are permitted, instead of actually paying out medals by the hopper device 51, the number of credits (credits stored in a credit storage area (not shown)) is stored. The number of medals is added to the number of payouts, and credit addition processing is performed to virtually pay out medals.

  When the replay is won, the replay processing means 760A performs a replay process (re-game process) for setting the same preparation state as the previous game without having to insert medals owned by the player for the next game. That is, in the present embodiment, when a replay is won, an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the previous game without using medals (including credit medals) held by the player is performed. Then, the next game start operation on the start lever 16 is awaited with the same activated line set as the previous game.

(Game state transition and game state transition control means)
FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram of the transition of the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the game state transition control means 770A performs a game state transition control process for transitioning the game state between the normal state, the RBB established state, and the RBB state. One condition or a plurality of conditions may be defined as the game state transition condition. When a plurality of conditions are determined, the game state is changed based on that one of the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied or that all of the plurality of predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to shift to another game state.

  The normal state is a game state corresponding to an initial state among a plurality of types of game states, and a transition from the normal state to an RBB established state is possible. Specifically, when the RBB is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the RBB established state.

  The RBB established state is a gaming state to which a transition is made when the RBB is won by internal lottery. Further, in the RBB established state, the winning combination and the replay are determined while the lottery flag corresponding to the RBB is maintained in the winning state until the RBB wins, and the symbol combination indicating the winning form of the RBB is displayed on the activated line. Then, the game state transition control means 770A transitions the game state from the RBB established state to the RBB state based on the winning of the RBB.

  The RBB state is a gaming state in which the symbol combination indicating the winning form of the RBB is displayed on the activated line as an opportunity (based on the winning of the RBB).

  Further, in the RBB state, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied based on the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game in the RBB state, and exceeds a predetermined expected end payout number (for example, 63). When a medal is paid out, the gaming state transition control means 770A terminates the RBB state and returns the gaming state to the normal state (transition to the normal state based on the termination condition of the RBB state being completed).

(Such as net increase in the game state)
In the normal state, the internal lottery is performed with reference to the internal lottery table 1 in which RBB is set as a lottery target among the internal lottery tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. As described above, in the normal state, the internal lottery is performed so that there is a case where the RBB is won. In the normal state, the payout rate is set to less than 100% (so that the payout rate is less than 1 and the payout rate does not exceed 1).

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the net increase of the medals when no miss is made is as follows.

(6 sheets-3 sheets) x 655/65536
+ (12 sheets-3 sheets) x 28816/65536
+ (0-3) × (9000; RBB + 18087; loss) / 65536
≒ 2.75 sheets.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal state, the net increase under the free hitting condition by the forward push is as follows.

(6-3 sheets) x 655/65536 x 3024/9261 (PB)
-3 sheets x 655/65536 x (1-3024 / 9261)
+ (12 pieces-3 pieces) x 4/65536 x 4 (batting order bells 1, 2, 7, 8)
-2 sheets (1 sheet) x 3600/65536 x 8 (batting order bells 3-6, 9-12) x 1/2 (PB)
-3 sheets (missing one sheet) x 3600/65536 x 8 (batting order bells 3-6, 9-12) x 1/2 (PB)
-3 sheets (loose or RBB) x (9587 + 17500) / 65536
≒ -2.35 sheets.

  In the RBB established state, among the internal lottery tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 69, the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table 2 is performed. In this case, the net increase under the condition that the batting order bell is not lost in the RBB established state is as follows.

(6-3 sheets) x 655/65536 x 3024/9261 (PB)
-3 sheets (dropped cherry) x 655/65536 x (1-3024 / 9261)
+ (12 sheets-3 sheets) x 28816/65536
≒ 3.94 sheets. In addition, PB is a symbol pull-in rate, and in the case of a 6-sheet winning combination, PB = 12 × 21 × 12/9261 = 3024/9261, and there is no payout of medals when missing.

  Further, in the RBB established state, the net increase under free hitting conditions by the forward push in the non-AT state is as follows.

(6-3 sheets) x 655/65536 x 3024/9261 (PB)
-3 sheets x 655/65536 x (1-3024 / 9261)
+ (12 pieces-3 pieces) x 4/65536 x 4 (batting order bells 1, 2, 7, 8)
-2 sheets (1 sheet) x 3600/65536 x 8 (batting order bells 3-6, 9-12) x 1/2 (PB)
-3 sheets (missing one sheet) x 3600/65536 x 8 (batting order bells 3-6, 9-12) x 1/2 (PB)
≒ -1.11 sheets.

(AT control means)
FIG. 75 is a transition diagram of the effect state.

  In the present embodiment, in the RBB established state, if the AT lottery is won, the AT control unit 775A functions. Note that the AT control unit 775A may function in another mode even when the game state is the normal state, but the function will not be described here. Hereinafter, an aspect in the RBB established state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the AT control unit 775A changes (transitions) the effect state among a plurality of effect states including a non-AT state, an AT preparation state, a first AT state, a second AT state, and a third AT state. Let it.

  The AT control unit 775A performs AT random determination in a non-AT state, for example, triggered by a predetermined event. The predetermined event is optional, but in the present embodiment, as an example, the AT control unit 775A determines whether to shift the effect state to the first AT state based on the fact that the cherry is won by internal lottery. Perform lottery. In the AT lottery, one of 32768 random numbers from 0 to 32767 is obtained, the obtained random number is compared with the AT lottery table stored in the main lottery table storage unit 791A, and according to the comparison result. It is determined whether the AT lottery has been won. In the AT lottery table, each of 32768 random numbers from 0 to 32767 is associated with either a win or a loss, and the random number value obtained in the AT lottery table is associated with the win in the AT lottery table. Is determined, it is determined that the AT lottery has been won. Note that a low probability state and a high probability state may be set as the lottery state of the AT lottery. When the lottery state is the high probability state, the AT lottery table set so that the winning probability is higher than when the lottery state is the low probability state is referred to. Note that the winning probability of the AT random determination may be changed according to the winning mode in the internal random determination.

  In this embodiment, the AT control unit 775A forms one predetermined special effect state each time an AT lottery is won in a state where the gaming state is the RBB established state. One predetermined special effect state necessarily includes the first AT state, usually further includes the second AT state, and in a predetermined case (described later), further includes the third AT state.

  One predetermined special effect state is started via an AT preparation state when an AT lottery is won. However, in a modified example, it may be started directly from the non-AT state (without going through the AT preparation state).

  When the effect state is the first AT state and the gaming state is the RBB established state, the state corresponds to the former "small win game" in the fourth machine. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the state in which the effect state is the first AT state and the gaming state is the RBB established state is also referred to as a “pseudo-small-role game state”, and the game in the pseudo-small-role game state is referred to as “pseudo-small-play game” ".

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the maximum number of pseudo small win games that can be executed in one predetermined special effect state is 30 times. For example, in a case where three sets of the second AT state that can be shifted from the first AT state are executed, the pseudo small combination game can be executed up to the game that is the trigger for shifting to the third set. For example, when the transition to the second AT state of the third set occurs in the twentieth pseudo small role game in total, the pseudo small role game in the predetermined special effect state this time is ended (therefore, in this case, the pseudo small role game) The number of small portion games is "20").

  The trigger for the transition from the first AT state to the second AT state (the same for the transition from the third AT state to the second AT state) is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, as an example, the winning combination of the predetermined combination in the first AT state Is displayed on the activated line. The predetermined combination is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, it is Replay 2 as an example. Note that, in the modified example, the opportunity to shift to the second AT state may be that a predetermined combination has been won in the first AT state. Hereinafter, "the symbol combination indicating the winning pattern of the predetermined combination is displayed on the activated line" is also simply referred to as "winning of the predetermined combination". In another modification, the transition to the second AT state is triggered by the fact that the result of the internal lottery in the first AT state is “losing” or that the result of the separately performed transition lottery is “hit”. Is also good.

  When the effect state is the second AT state and the game state is the RBB established state, the state corresponds to the "RB state" of the former No. 4 machine. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the state in which the effect state is the second AT state and the gaming state is the RBB established state is also referred to as a “pseudo bonus state”, and the game in the pseudo bonus state is also referred to as a “pseudo RBB game”.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, in one predetermined special effect state, a maximum of three sets of pseudo RBB games can be executed by setting 20 times. Accordingly, the maximum number of pseudo RBB games that can be executed in one predetermined special effect state is 60 (20 times × 3 sets).

  The third AT state is an effect state that can be specially executed under predetermined conditions, and is a special effect state that is executed to guarantee the execution of three sets of pseudo RBB games. For example, when the transition to the second AT state does not occur three times in the pseudo small win game state (however, the replay 2 is not won three times even though the replay 2 winning has occurred three or more times). A third AT state is formed.

  When the effect state is the third AT state and the gaming state is the RBB established state, the state is substantially the same as the pseudo bonus state described above. There is no upper limit on the number of games that can be maintained in the third AT state, and in the present embodiment, the third AT state ends based on, for example, a predetermined combination winning in the third AT state. Note that details of the effect state transition condition will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, in a game in which the rendering state is set in the first AT state, the second AT state, and the third AT state, the rendering control means 780A notifies the player of the correct batting order when the batting order bell is won, thereby reducing the number of played twelve pieces. A prize assisting effect for assisting the prize of (small role 1, 2, 3) is performed. However, in the game in which the effect state is set in the first AT state (ie, the pseudo small-play game), the net increase is made smaller than in the game in which the effect state is set in the second AT state (ie, the pseudo RBB game). A prize assisting performance is performed. For example, the prize assisting effect is performed such that the net increase is about 1.42 in the pseudo small role game and about 3.95 in the pseudo RBB game. The game in which the effect state is set in the third AT state is the same as the pseudo RBB game, and the prize assist effect is performed so that the net increase is about 3.95.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, in the first AT state, an auxiliary effect of notifying the correct answer to the batting order bells 1 to 12 only in the first batting order is performed (thus, the possibility of the correct batting order is）), and the second AT In the state and the third AT state, an auxiliary effect of notifying the batting order of the batting order bells 1 to 12 (at least the correct answer of the first batting order and the second batting order) is performed. In the modified example, in the first AT state, an auxiliary effect is performed only when the batting order bells 1 to 6 of the batting order bells 1 to 12 are won, and in the second AT state and the third AT state, the batting order bells 1 to 12 are provided. It is also possible to always perform an auxiliary production.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the effect state is set in the first AT state (that is, the pseudo small combination game), the net increase is about 1.42 as follows.

(6-3 sheets) x 655/65536 x 3024/9261 (PB)
-3 sheets x 655/65536 x (1-3024 / 9261)
+ (12-3 sheets) x 28816/65536 x 1/2 (1st batting order information for batting order bells 1-12)
-2 sheets (1 sheet role) x 28816/65536 x 1/2 x 1/2 (PB for 1 sheet role)
-3 sheets (missing one sheet) x 28816/65536 x 1/2 x 1/2 (PB of one sheet)
$ 1.42.

  In the game in which the rendering state is set in the second AT state (that is, the pseudo RBB game) and in the game in which the rendering state is set in the third AT state, as described above, the condition in which the batting order bell is not missed is used. , And the net increase is about 3.94 as described above.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 75, the transition state of the effect state will be described in more detail.

  In the non-AT state, the AT control unit 775A shifts the effect state to the AT preparation state based on winning of the AT lottery.

  In addition, the AT control unit 775A shifts the effect state from the AT preparation state to the first AT state based on a predetermined AT start condition being satisfied in the AT preparation state. The predetermined AT start condition is arbitrary, but may be satisfied when the game of the specified number N4 (for example, a variable value less than 32) ends from the game won in the AT lottery.

  In addition, the AT control unit 775A shifts the effect state from the first AT state to the second AT state when the symbol combination indicating the winning combination of the predetermined combination is displayed on the activated line in the first AT state. As described above, the predetermined combination is the replay 2 as an example in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the AT control unit 775A determines that the total of 30 pseudo small win games (the number of games in one predetermined special effect state, hereinafter the same) have ended, and the number of wins of the predetermined win until then is (1 time). The number of winnings in the predetermined special effect state (hereinafter, the same applies hereinafter) is less than three times, and the effect state is shifted from the first AT state to the third AT state.

  Further, the AT control means 775A changes the effect state from the first AT state to the non-AT state based on the fact that the total of 30 pseudo small win games have been completed and the number of wins of the predetermined win is 3 or more. Transition to the state.

  Further, the AT control means 775A changes the effect state to the second state based on the fact that 20 pseudo RBB games (the number of games in one set, hereinafter the same) are completed in the pseudo bonus state in the first set or the second set. The state is shifted from the 2AT state to the first AT state. However, if a total of 30 pseudo small win games have already been completed, the AT control means 775A changes the effect state to the second AT state on the condition that the number of wins of the predetermined win is less than three. To the third AT state. On the other hand, the AT control means 775A sets the production state to the second AT state if the pseudo small combination game has already been completed for a total of 30 times and the number of winnings of the predetermined combination is 3 or more. To the non-AT state.

  Also, in the third set of pseudo bonus states, the AT control means 775A shifts the effect state from the second AT state to the non-AT state when the 20 pseudo RBB games are completed.

  Further, the AT control unit 775A shifts the effect state from the third AT state to the second AT state based on the fact that the predetermined combination has won in the third AT state.

  Further, in the third AT state, the AT control unit 775A changes the effect state to the third effect state if the predetermined combination has been won but has not been won, and if the number of wins of the predetermined combination in the current predetermined special effect state has reached three. Shift from the 3AT state to the non-AT state. Accordingly, in the third AT state, if the player wins the predetermined combination but does not win, the shift to the second AT state is not realized.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the predetermined combination is won three or more times before the total of 30 pseudo small combination games are completed, the predetermined special effect state is completed without realizing the third AT state. I do. In this case, for example, if the number of wins of the predetermined combination in the pseudo small combination game state is three and all three have been won, three sets of the pseudo RBB game are executed 20 times.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined combination has been won less than three times before the total of 30 pseudo small combination games are completed, the third AT state is realized. Then, in the third AT state, if the predetermined combination is won and a prize is won, by shifting to the second AT state, 20 pseudo RBB games (pseudo bonus state) can be executed. It should be noted that the number of sets of 20 pseudo RBB games that can be executed by shifting from the third AT state to the second AT state is such that the number of wins of the predetermined combination reaches three in the one predetermined special effect state. Only what is allowed. Therefore, in a given special special effect state, if the number of wins of the predetermined combination until the total of 30 pseudo small combination games are completed is 0, the effect state is set via the game set to the third AT state. The maximum number of sets of the 20 pseudo RBB games that can be executed is three, and if the number of wins of the predetermined combination until the total of thirty pseudo small combination games ends is one, the effect state is The maximum number of sets of the 20 pseudo RBB games that can be executed through the game set to the 3AT state is 2 times, and the number of wins of the predetermined combination until the total of 30 pseudo small combination games ends is 2 If it is a round, the maximum set number of the 20 pseudo RBB games that can be executed through the game in which the effect state is set to the third AT state is one.

(Advantageous sections, etc.)
In the present embodiment, an advantageous section can be set as a management game section, and the effect state can be set to the AT preparation state, the first AT state, the second AT state, or the third AT state only in the case of the advantageous section. It has become. For this reason, when the advantageous section ends when the effect state is set to the AT preparation state, the first AT state, the second AT state, or the third AT state, the AT preparation state, the first AT state, the second AT state, Alternatively, the third AT state is forcibly ended, and the effect state shifts to the non-AT state. The condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied based on, for example, paying out a prescribed number of medals (for example, 2400, hereinafter, also referred to as “MY2400”) or ending a prescribed number (for example, 1500) of games.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating transition between the advantageous section and the normal section. In the present embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 76, in the normal section, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed based on winning in the advantageous section shift lottery. In the advantageous section, the winning probability is set to the high probability state as the AT random determination state. In addition, in the advantageous section, when the above-described end condition is satisfied, the transition is made to the normal section.

(Effect control means)
Returning to FIG. 68, the effect control unit 780A will be described. The effect control unit 780A performs control relating to a display effect performed using the display device 11 and a sound effect performed using the speaker group 84 based on the effect data stored in the effect data storage unit 797A. For example, a lamp or LED is turned on or blinked in response to a medal insertion, an operation on the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b, a start lever 16, a stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, or a game event such as a change in a game state. The game, change the display content of the liquid crystal display LCD, or output a sound from the speaker, thereby performing an execution control of an effect for raising the game or assisting the game in accordance with the progress of the game. . The content of the effect performed in the game is determined by referring to the effect lottery table stored in the sub-lottery table storage means (not shown) according to the game state, the effect state, the result of the internal lottery, and the like. .

  The effect control unit 780A may execute an effect indicating the winning state of the AT lottery when the effect state is the AT preparation state. Further, when the effect state is the AT preparation state, the effect control means 780A transmits an effect (for example, a pseudo reel (not shown) for transmitting the start of the predetermined special effect state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined AT start condition. Special effect, and an effect of outputting the number of the zigzag line on the display device 11). Thereby, the player can clearly know the start of the predetermined special effect state.

  In the case where the effect state is the first AT state, the second AT state, and the third AT state, the effect control unit 780A provides a prize assisting effect of notifying the correct batting order at the time of winning the batting order bell and assisting the winning of the 12 small role. The control to be executed by the display device 11 and the speaker group 84 is performed. In addition, when the effect state is the first AT state and the third AT state, the effect control unit 780A notifies the display device 11 and the speaker of the winning assisting effect of notifying the correct hitting order at the time of winning the hit order replay and assisting the winning of the replay 2. The control to be executed by the group 84 is performed.

(Effects of the present embodiment)
According to the present embodiment, even if the predetermined combination does not win three times in the pseudo small combination game state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. A pseudo small win game with a relatively small net increase (in the present embodiment, for example, approximately one pure increase) (a small win game referred to in the former Unit 4) can be executed up to 30 times, and a predetermined combination in the pseudo small win game state is won. In a specification in which a maximum of three sets of 20 pseudo RBB games (net increase of about 4 × 20 games) can be executed each time, even if the predetermined combination is not won three times in the pseudo small combination game state, the effect state is A game set to the 3AT state (a game of net increase (about 4 net increase) same as the pseudo RBB game) can be executed. Then, when the effect state is set to the third AT state, a state of winning the next predetermined combination is awaited, and the same net increase game as the pseudo RBB game becomes possible. In this case, if the next predetermined combination wins in a game in which the effect state is set to the third AT state, a pseudo bonus state is formed. In this manner, according to the present embodiment, in a predetermined case, a game in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state can be made up to a predetermined combination of three times in total (the production state is set to the third AT state) Game) can be executed.

  Here, as a comparative example, if a puncture is made by not jacking in three times by lottery during the 30 small role game in the former No. 4 machine, a bonus to win the bonus in the first game after the end of the bonus game ( There is a specification that a so-called 1G series occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as compared with the comparative example, a special game (game in which the effect state is set to the third AT state) different from the 1G series is created, so that the range of game characteristics is expanded. In addition, the number of payouts that can be expected when the predetermined combination is not won three times is likely to be smaller than that of the 1G series, and it is easy to adjust 2,400 advantageous sections MY.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, by creating a situation in which the predetermined combination is not won in a relatively long probability, it is easy to stay in the pseudo small combination game state in which the net increase is relatively small, and the advantageous section MY2400 Adjustment becomes easier. From this point of view, in the internal lottery table 2, the winning probability of replay 2 (strike order replay) is that the frequency of winning the predetermined combination three or more times by the end of the 30 pseudo small role games is 30 pseudo pseudo combinations. The frequency is set to be higher than the frequency in a case where the predetermined combination is not won three or more times before the small combination game ends. For example, the winning probability of replay 2 (strike order replay) may be set to about 1/7 to 1/12.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is easy to adjust 2,400 sheets of the advantageous section MY by the game characteristic in which the pseudo small role game state in which the net increase is relatively small and the pseudo bonus state in which the net increase is relatively large are integrated. . That is, since the pseudo small role game state exists, a large number of balls will not be realized at a stretch in the pseudo bonus state in which the pseudo RBB game is performed with a net increase of about four, and it is easy to adjust the advantageous section MY2400 sheets. Become.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even if the predetermined combination is won, it is possible to avoid winning. That is, if the player does not follow the batting order instruction (navigation) by the auxiliary effect and does not push forward, winning of the predetermined combination can be avoided. Since the pseudo small win game has a net increase greater than 0, it is advantageous to continue the pseudo small win game state as long as possible (up to 30 games). On the other hand, after trying to keep the pseudo small role game state for a long time and avoiding winning of the predetermined role one or more times, the pseudo small role game ends 30 times without realizing the winning of the predetermined role three times. In some cases, one predetermined special effect state may end without executing three sets of 20 pseudo RBB games. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while being aware of the timing of winning the predetermined role in the pseudo small role game state so as to obtain as many medals as possible in one predetermined special production state, and the interest is improved. I do.

  In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve a game characteristic reminiscent of the former No. 4 machine, suppress gambling and expand the range of game characteristics as compared with the former No. 4 machine. .

(Processing flow)
Next, a flow of a process related to the game control according to the above-described second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIGS. 77 to 79 are schematic flowcharts showing an example of the processing during the advantageous section. The processing shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is executed by, for example, the main control board 71, and the processing shown in FIG. 79 is executed by the sub control board 72, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 77, when a game start operation is performed on the start lever 16 (Y in step S300), an internal lottery is performed (step S302), a non-AT state is established (Y in step S304), and a cherry is won. Then (Y in step S306), AT lottery is performed (step S308).

  When a stop operation is performed on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (Y in step S310), a reel stop process corresponding to the operated stop button is performed (step S312), and a reel corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. Is performed (Y in step S314), a winning determination process is performed (step S316), and a payout control process is performed (step S318).

  Here, when the non-internal state is established (Y in step S320), the gaming state is the normal state or the RBB state.

  If the game state is the normal state, if the RBB wins in the current game (in this case, the game has won the RBB) (Y in step S322), the game state becomes the RBB state (step S324). . On the other hand, if the RBB has not won in the current game (N in step S322), the RBB end event does not occur in the current game in the normal state (N in S326), and the process proceeds to step S327. Then, when an RBB is won in the current game (Y in step S327), the game state is an RBB established state (step S329). On the other hand, when the RBB has not been won in the current game (N in step S327), the game ends (the game state remains unchanged).

  If the game state is the RBB state, since the RBB does not win in the current game (N in S322), the process proceeds to step S326, and when the RBB end event occurs in the current game (Y in step S326). , The game state becomes the normal state (step S328). On the other hand, if the RBB end event has not occurred in the current game (N in step S326), no RBB is won in the current game in the RBB state (N in step S327), and the process ends (game). The state remains unchanged in the RBB state).

  Returning to step S320, if the non-internal state is not established (N in step S320), that is, if the gaming state is the RBB established state, the process proceeds to step S323. Then, when the RBB wins in the current game (Y in step S323), the gaming state becomes the RBB state (step S324). On the other hand, if the RBB has not been won in the current game (N in step S323), the process proceeds to the AT state control process (step S330). The AT control processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the AT state control processing (step S330 in FIG. 77) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 78, when the game is in the non-AT state (Y in step S3300) and the AT lottery is won in this game (Y in step S3302), the AT state shifts to the AT preparation state (step S3304). .

  If the state is not the non-AT state (N in step S3300), the state is the AT preparation state (Y in step S3306), and if the AT start condition is satisfied (Y in step S3308), the AT state shifts to the first AT state (step S3308). Step S3310). At this time, the pseudo small combination game number counter C3, the pseudo bonus set number counter C4, and the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 are set to “0” as initial values (step S3312), and the flag of the third AT state is “0”. (Step S3314).

  Returning to step S3306, if it is not in the AT preparation state (N in step S3306), if it is the first AT state (Y in step S3316), "1" is added to the pseudo small combination game number counter C3 (step S3318). Here, if the predetermined combination (transfer to the second AT state) has been won in this game (Y in step S3320), “1” is added to the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 (step S3322). If the predetermined combination has been won in this game (Y in step S3324), “1” is added to the pseudo bonus set number counter C4 (step S3326). Then, the AT state shifts to the second AT state (step S3328).

  When the predetermined combination (transfer to the second AT state) is not won in the current game (N in step S3320) or when the predetermined combination does not win in the current game (N in step S3324), the process proceeds to step S3330. . If the pseudo small combination game number counter C3 is "30" (Y in step S3330) and the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is "3" or more (Y in step S3332), the AT state is not set. The state shifts to the AT state (step S3334). On the other hand, if the pseudo small combination game number counter C3 is not "30" (N in step S3330), the process ends.

  If the pseudo small combination game number counter C3 is "30" (Y in step S3330), but the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is not "3" (N in step S3332), the AT state changes to the third AT state. The process is shifted (step S3336). At this time, the flag of the third AT state is set to “1” (step S3338).

  Returning to step S3316, if the state is not the first AT state (N in step S3316), the flow proceeds to step S3340. Then, in the second AT state (Y in step S3340), if the current game is the first game in this set (Y in step S3342), the pseudo bonus game number counter C5 is set to "1" (step S3342). Step S3344).

  On the other hand, when the current game is not the first game in the current set (N in step S3342), “1” is added to the pseudo bonus game number counter C5 (step S3346), and the process proceeds to step S3348. If the pseudo bonus game number counter C5 is "20" (Y in step S3348) and the pseudo bonus set number counter C4 is "3" (Y in step S3350), the AT state is a non-AT state. The process proceeds to (S3352).

On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus set number counter C4 is not “3” (N in step S3350), the process proceeds to step S3354. Then, if the flag of the third AT state is “0” (Y in step S3354) and the pseudo small combination gaming counter C3 is “29” or less (Y in S3355), the AT state shifts to the first AT state. (Step S3356). If the flag of the third AT state is not “0” (N in step S3354), the AT state shifts to the third AT state (step S3357). If the pseudo small combination game number counter C3 is not equal to or smaller than "29" (N in step S3355), the flow advances to step S3358. Then, if the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is equal to or more than "3" (Y in step S3358), the AT state shifts to the non-AT state (step S3359). On the other hand, if the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is not equal to or more than "3" (N in step S3358), the AT state shifts to the third AT state (step S3360).

Returning to step S3340, if the state is not the second AT state (N in step S3340), the state is the third AT state, and the flow proceeds to step S3361. If the predetermined combination has been won in the current game (Y in step S3361), “1” is added to the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 (step S3362). If the predetermined combination has been won in the current game (Y in step S3364), “1” is added to the pseudo bonus set number counter C4 (step S3366), and the AT state shifts to the second AT state (step S3366). S3368). On the other hand, if the predetermined combination has not been won in this game (N in step S3364) and the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is "3" (Y in step S3369), the AT state is set to the non-AT state. The process proceeds to (Step S3370). In addition, the predetermined combination has not been won in this game (N in step S3364), and the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is not "3" (N in step S3369) (in this case, in the third AT state) Therefore, the predetermined combination winning number counter C6 is necessarily less than 3), and the process ends.

  Next, an auxiliary effect corresponding to the AT state control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 79, a game start operation is performed on the start lever 16 (Y in step S402), the AT state is determined, and if the state is the first AT state (Y in step S404), an auxiliary effect only in the first batting order is made. Is performed (step S406).

  If the state is not the first AT state (N in step S404) and if the state is the second AT state (Y in step S408), an auxiliary effect in all batting order is performed (step S410). Similarly, if the state is not the second AT state (N in step S408) but is in the third AT state (Y in step S412), an auxiliary effect in all batting order is performed (step S414). If the state is not the third AT state (N in step S412) (that is, if the state is the non-AT state), the auxiliary effect is not performed (step S416).

  In the present embodiment, the second AT state and the third AT state are substantially the same as the effect state, but may be different. For example, the degree of assistance may be made different between the second AT state and the third AT state by an auxiliary effect. However, in the second AT state and the third AT state, the degree of assistance is higher than in the first AT state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of sets of the pseudo RBB game state that can be executed in one predetermined special effect state is “α”, and the number of pseudo small role games that can be executed in one predetermined special effect state is When the maximum value is “β” and the number of pseudo RBB games per set is “γ”, α = 3, β = 30, and γ = 20, but not limited thereto. For example, another value (each value of α, β, and γ) that satisfies the relationship of β> γ and β <γ × α may be adopted. Further, if it is set to the former Unit 4, another value that satisfies the relationship β> γ × α may be adopted. From the viewpoint of the net increase (inclination value), the net increase in “β + α × γ” (that is, the net increase realized by β pseudo small role games and α × γ pseudo RBB games) is “α”. The values of α, β, and γ may be determined so as to be equal to or less than half the net increase in “× γ” (that is, the net increase realized by α × γ pseudo RBB games).

  In the present embodiment, the net increase in the pseudo small role game state is “X1”, the net increase in the pseudo RBB game state is “Y1”, the effect state is the third AT state, and the game state is the RBB established state. When the net increase at a certain time is “Z1”, X1 <Y1 = Z1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, X1 <Y1 <Z1, or X1 ≒ Y1 <Z1.

  In the present embodiment, the batting order replay in which the predetermined combination (replay 2) can be won is only one type in which the correct batting order is only forward pushing. However, the batting order replay is performed even if the correct batting order is various types. Good. For example, the first batting order replay in which the correct batting order in which the predetermined combination (replay 2) can be won is batting order 1 (“left → middle → right”) or batting order 2 (“left → right → middle”), and the predetermined combination ( The second batting order replay in which the correct batting order in which replay 2) can be awarded is batting order 3 (“middle → left → right”) or batting order 4 (“middle → right → left”), and a predetermined combination (replay 2) is awarded. A third batting order replay in which the possible batting order is batting order 5 (“right → left → middle”) or batting order 6 (“right → middle → left”) may be set. In this case, the auxiliary effect may not be displayed even if any of the batting order replays is won. If the auxiliary effect is not displayed, the number of balls that can be obtained in the current special special effect state may change depending on whether or not the correct answer is in the correct order, and the player plays the game so as to apply or not to apply the batting order according to the situation. You can enjoy and enhance the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied in the pseudo RBB gaming state, the next pseudo RBB gaming state is formed without passing through the predetermined combination (without passing through the pseudo small combination game state). Good (ie, the next set of pseudo RBB games may be started). In this case, the specific condition may be, for example, a win of a specific combination, a specific lottery, or the like. Alternatively, the specific condition may be winning of a predetermined combination in the pseudo RBB gaming state.

  <Supplementary note (Summary of the present invention)>

[First to fourth gaming machines]
Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine having a function of reading moving image data into a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), developing the data, and displaying a three-dimensional moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. No. 155438).

  By the way, in recent years, in a gaming machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a variety of effects with high image quality utilizing a three-dimensional CG (Computer Graphics) technology have become mainstream. Since the CG data for performing the various effects is created in advance, and the created CG data is stored in the CGROM, the cost of creating the CG is increasing year by year.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to provide a high-quality image utilizing three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in cost associated with CG creation. And to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various effects.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display operation of the image using the display unit,
Non-volatile storage of a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit A memory unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86).
The control unit includes:
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, virtually project an image corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a direction of a player's eyes) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. Generating first viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected on the virtual object based on the predetermined original image data and the virtual object data;
In the virtual space, a second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an incident direction of actual video light). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) and storing the data of the second viewpoint image in the volatile storage unit;
A gaming machine, comprising: converting data of the second viewpoint image stored in the volatile storage unit into a video signal and outputting the video signal.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
Storage in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. (For example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86);
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit,
When a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, a direction of a player's eyes) onto the virtual object arranged in the virtual space, the image is projected on the virtual object. Generating first viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object,
In the virtual space, a second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an incident direction of actual video light). A gaming machine characterized by generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data).

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit,
Storage in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. (For example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86);
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit,
When a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, a direction of a player's eyes) onto the virtual object arranged in the virtual space, the image is projected on the virtual object. Generating first viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object,
In the virtual space, a second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an incident direction of actual video light). Generate viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data),
The first direction is a direction of a line of sight of a player with respect to the display surface of the image on the display unit, and the second direction is a direction of incidence of the image light on the display surface of the image on the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display operation of the image using the display unit,
Non-volatile storage of a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit A memory unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86).
The control unit includes:
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, virtually project an image corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of a player's eyes) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. Then, data of a first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object. Storing the viewpoint image data in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
In the virtual space, a second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual video light incident direction). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) and storing the data of the second viewpoint image in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; A game machine that converts data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputs the video signal.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
Non-volatile storage of a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit Storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, virtually project an image corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of a player's eyes) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. Then, data of a first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object. Storing the viewpoint image data in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
In the virtual space, a second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual video light incident direction). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) and storing the data of the second viewpoint image in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; Converting the data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputting the video signal;
A gaming machine, wherein the size of the third buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the size of the second buffer is larger than the size of the third buffer.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit,
Non-volatile storage of a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit Storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86);
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, virtually project an image corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of a player's eyes) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. Then, data of a first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object. Storing the viewpoint image data in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
In the virtual space, a second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual video light incident direction). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) and storing the data of the second viewpoint image in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; Converting the data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputting the video signal;
The first direction is a direction of a line of sight of a player with respect to the display surface of the image on the display unit, and the second direction is a direction of incidence of the image light on the display surface of the image on the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 3-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display operation of the image using the display unit,
A nonvolatile storage unit that stores a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and texture information (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit; (For example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86).
The control unit includes:
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects the texture information,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data is stored in the predetermined original image data and the texture information. Generated based on
A gaming machine, wherein the pseudo three-dimensional image data generated in the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal, and the converted video signal is output.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 3-2th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A storage unit (for example, a storage unit) that stores a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and texture information (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit. , A ROM cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects the texture information,
The image processing unit,
Pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the texture information. Gaming machine.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 3-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit,
A nonvolatile storage unit that stores a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and texture information (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit; (For example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86);
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects the texture information,
The image processing unit,
Generating pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data based on the predetermined original image data and the texture information; The data is stored in a predetermined buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the storage unit,
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the predetermined buffer in which the pseudo three-dimensional image data is stored to a specific buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; Converting data (eg, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the buffer into a video signal, outputting the video signal,
A gaming machine, wherein the size of the specific buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the size of the predetermined buffer is larger than the size of the specific buffer.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-1th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display operation of the image using the display unit,
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double field angle data including resource image data), and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which object data or texture data is stored;
The control unit includes:
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit,
The image processing unit,
Using a specific conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix Pe) from image data obtained by performing predetermined processing on the predetermined image data based on information for displaying the image on the display unit, Extracting data of the image displayed by the display unit, converting the data of the extracted image into a video signal, outputting the video signal,
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix P ′) for performing a projection conversion process on the image data on which the viewing angle is set to a predetermined angle and the predetermined process is performed. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, an offset matrix O).

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-2th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double field angle data including resource image data), and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) storing object data or texture data),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from among the plurality of image data stored in the storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit,
The image processing unit,
Using a specific conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix Pe) from image data obtained by performing predetermined processing on the predetermined image data based on information for displaying the image on the display unit, Converting to the image data displayed by the display unit,
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix P ′) for performing a projection conversion process on the image data on which the viewing angle is set to a predetermined angle and the predetermined process is performed. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, an offset matrix O).

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth to third gaming machines having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double field angle data including resource image data), and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) storing object data or texture data),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from among the plurality of image data stored in the storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit,
The image processing unit,
Using a specific conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix Pe) from image data obtained by performing predetermined processing on the predetermined image data based on information for displaying the image on the display unit, Extracting the data of the image displayed by the display unit,
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix P ′) for performing a projection conversion process on the image data on which the viewing angle is set to a predetermined angle and the predetermined processing is performed. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, an offset matrix O).
A game machine wherein the size of the image data subjected to the predetermined process is larger than the size of the image data extracted using the specific conversion parameter.

  According to the first to fourth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to execute various effects with high image quality utilizing three-dimensional CG technology, while suppressing an increase in cost associated with CG creation.

[Fifth and sixth gaming machines]
Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine having a function of reading moving image data into a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), developing the data, and displaying a three-dimensional moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. No. 155438).

  By the way, in recent years, in a gaming machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a variety of effects with high image quality utilizing a three-dimensional CG (Computer Graphics) technology have become mainstream. Since the CG data for performing the various effects is created in advance, and the created CG data is stored in the CGROM, the cost of creating the CG is increasing year by year. Conventionally, in this technical field, a technique of projecting an image on an object such as a three-dimensional object (three-dimensional screen) using a projector by a technique called a project mapping (texture mapping) method has been proposed. Adjustment for eliminating the displacement of the projected image with respect to the object is the greatest concern.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to suppress an increase in cost related to CG creation and to convert an image into a three-dimensional object ( It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of minimizing a deviation of a projected image with respect to an object when projecting onto an object such as a three-dimensional screen.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

A fixed first display unit (for example, trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, pseudo reel member 303) are included, and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit is provided. A display unit (for example, various projection target members), one of which can be an image display target;
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display operation of the image using the display unit,
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a virtual object corresponding to a form of the display unit on which the image is to be displayed (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) storing virtual object data),
Movable control means (for example, a projected member moving mechanism 305) for movably controlling the second display unit,
The control unit includes:
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit is configured to select predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and to display the predetermined original image data on the display unit. Select data of a predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, a virtual image corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually stored in the predetermined virtual object arranged in a virtual space from a first direction (for example, a direction of a player's eyes). Generating first viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected onto the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined virtual object based on the predetermined original image data and the predetermined virtual object data Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
In the virtual space, a first viewpoint image projected on the predetermined virtual object is acquired when the first viewpoint image is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual video light incident direction). Generating second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data) and storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; Converting the data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputting the video signal;
When the second display unit is movably controlled by the movable control unit, the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponds to the form of the display unit according to the operation state of the second display unit. A gaming machine characterized by using data of a virtual object.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-2th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A fixed first display unit (for example, trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, pseudo reel member 303) are included, and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit is provided. A display unit (for example, various projection target members), one of which can be an image display target;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a virtual object corresponding to a form of the display unit on which the image is to be displayed (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) storing virtual object data),
A movable control means (for example, a projected member moving mechanism 305) for movably controlling the second display unit;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit is configured to select predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and to display the predetermined original image data on the display unit. Select data of a predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, a virtual image corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually stored in the predetermined virtual object arranged in a virtual space from a first direction (for example, a direction of a player's eyes). Generating first viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected onto the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined virtual object based on the predetermined original image data and the predetermined virtual object data Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
In the virtual space, a first viewpoint image projected on the predetermined virtual object is acquired when the first viewpoint image is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual video light incident direction). Generating second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data) and storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; Converting the data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputting the video signal;
When the second display unit is movably controlled by the movable control unit, the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponds to a form of the display unit corresponding to an operation state of the second display unit. Using virtual object data,
A gaming machine, wherein the size of the third buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the size of the second buffer is larger than the size of the third buffer.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fifth to third gaming machines having the following configuration.

A fixed first display unit (for example, trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, pseudo reel member 303) are included, and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit is provided. A display unit (for example, various projection target members), one of which can be an image display target;
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit,
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a virtual object corresponding to a form of the display unit on which the image is to be displayed (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) storing virtual object data),
A movable control means (for example, a projected member moving mechanism 305) for movably controlling the second display unit;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit is configured to select predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and to display the predetermined original image data on the display unit. Select data of a predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, a virtual image corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually stored in the predetermined virtual object arranged in a virtual space from a first direction (for example, a direction of a player's eyes). Generating first viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected onto the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined virtual object based on the predetermined original image data and the predetermined virtual object data Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
In the virtual space, a first viewpoint image projected on the predetermined virtual object is acquired when the first viewpoint image is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual video light incident direction). Generating second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data) and storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit;
Transferring the image data displayed on the display unit from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit; Converting the data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputting the video signal;
When the second display unit is movably controlled by the movable control unit, the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponds to a form of the display unit corresponding to an operation state of the second display unit. Using virtual object data,
The first direction is a direction of a line of sight of a player with respect to the display surface of the image on the display unit, and the second direction is a direction of incidence of the image light on the display surface of the image on the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 6-1th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display operation of the image using the display unit,
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display mode configured by the display unit (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which data of the synthesized virtual object is stored;
The control unit includes:
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, GPU153) that performs a process related to the output of the image according to control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit is configured to select predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and to display the predetermined original image data on the display unit. Selecting data of the first virtual object corresponding to a display mode;
The image processing unit,
Using the volatile storage unit, decomposing the first virtual object into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of each projected member) corresponding to the display mode;
By using the volatile storage unit, each second virtual object arranged in the virtual space corresponds to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a player's eye direction). Data of a first viewpoint image (for example, virtual projection image data of each projection target member) projected onto each second virtual object when a video to be projected is virtually projected, by using the predetermined original image data and Generated based on the data of each second virtual object,
The first viewpoint image generated for each second virtual object is synthesized, and data of a synthesized image virtually projected on the first virtual object (for example, a synthesized virtual projected image) Data)
In the virtual space, a second image acquired when the composite image projected on the first virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) and storing the data of the second viewpoint image in the volatile storage unit;
A gaming machine, comprising: converting data of the second viewpoint image stored in the volatile storage unit into a video signal and outputting the video signal.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a sixth to sixth gaming machines having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display mode configured by the display unit (for example, A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which the data of the synthesized virtual object is stored;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and displays the display form of the display unit as a display target of the predetermined original image data Selecting data of the first virtual object corresponding to
The image processing unit,
Decomposing the first virtual object into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of the respective projected members) corresponding to the display mode;
When a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the player's eyes) to each of the second virtual objects arranged in the virtual space, Data of a predetermined viewpoint image projected on the second virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data of each projection target member) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and data of each second virtual object. And
The predetermined viewpoint images generated for the respective second virtual objects are combined, and data of a combined image virtually projected on the first virtual object (for example, combined virtual projection image data ).

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a sixth to third gaming machines having the following configuration.

A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members);
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit,
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display mode configured by the display unit (for example, A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which the data of the synthesized virtual object is stored;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a process of generating the image to be displayed on the display unit,
An image processing unit (for example, a GPU 153) that performs a process related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and displays the display form of the display unit as a display target of the predetermined original image data Selecting data of the first virtual object corresponding to
The image processing unit,
Decomposing the first virtual object into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of the respective projected members) corresponding to the display mode;
When a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, the direction of a player's eyes) on each second virtual object arranged in the virtual space. The data of the first viewpoint image projected on each second virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data of each projection target member) is calculated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of each second virtual object. Generate
The first viewpoint image generated for each second virtual object is synthesized, and data of a synthesized image virtually projected on the first virtual object (for example, a synthesized virtual projected image) Data)
In the virtual space, a second image acquired when the synthesized image projected on the first virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light). Generate viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data),
The first direction is a direction of a line of sight of a player with respect to the display surface of the image on the display unit, and the second direction is a direction of incidence of the image light on the display surface of the image on the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the fifth and sixth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost related to CG creation and to project an image on an object such as a three-dimensional object (three-dimensional screen) using a projector. In addition, it is possible to minimize the displacement of the projected image with respect to the object.

[Seventh gaming machine]
Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the BGM output from the first channel is faded out, the sound effect of one game effect is output from the second channel, and the first sound effect is output after the sound effect of the one game effect is output. A gaming machine that continuously outputs BGM by fading in BGM output from a channel of the same type has been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209939).

  By the way, in recent years, the staging contents of sound have been diversified in gaming machines, and there has been a demand for more efficient creation (production) of sound data. For example, when a series of effects is formed while two or more scenes are switched, if the timing of the switching is undefined, it is necessary to create a large amount of sound data in accordance with the variation of the switching timing. There is also a problem that when a large amount of sound data is required, a storage area for mounting is required correspondingly (third problem).

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to cope with diversification of audio production contents and to improve the efficiency of sound data creation. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be achieved.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides 7-1 to 7-8 gaming machines having the following configuration.

[No. 7-1 gaming machine]
A game machine (1) including sound control means (for example, first sound effect processing units 1500, 1500B, 1500C) capable of executing control relating to sound and sound output means (for example, speakers 64L and 64R) capable of outputting sound. So,
The sound control means (for example, the first sound effect processing units 1500, 1500B, 1500C)
When a predetermined condition (for example, command numbers “541”, “542”, “641”, and “642” are registered and a start switch is turned on) is satisfied, the first sound is output via the sound output means (for example, speakers 64L and 64R). A first sound (for example, telephone voice sound data) associated with a channel (for example, CH5) is started to be reproduced at a first volume (for example, a normal volume of volume “255”), and a second channel (for example, CH6) ) Corresponding to the second volume (for example, mute of volume “0”) lower than the first volume (for example, normal volume of volume “255”) Volume) and at the same time or at a time (for example, a certain time T7 in FIG. 58) delayed from the reproduction start timing of the first sound. Processing of starting playback timing (e.g. step of FIG. 32 S322: first audio reproduction process) and,
When the switching condition (for example, “third stop operation”) is satisfied, the volume of the first sound (for example, sound data of telephone voice) is changed from the first volume (for example, the normal volume of volume “255”) to the third volume. Decrease the volume (eg, mute volume of volume “0”) or stop the reproduction of the first sound (eg, telephone voice sound data), and reduce the second sound (eg, normal voice sound data). A process of increasing the volume from the second volume (for example, mute volume of volume "0") to a fourth volume (for example, normal volume of volume "255") (for example, step S326 in FIG. 32: second audio reproduction process) And
Executable,
The first sound (for example, telephone voice sound data) output at the first volume (for example, the normal volume of volume "255") via the sound output means (for example, speakers 64L and 64R); The second sound (eg, normal voice sound data) output at the fourth volume (eg, normal volume of volume “255”) via output means (eg, speakers 64L, 64R) is a series of sounds. A gaming machine (1) that forms an effect (eg, a dialogue sound "Do you hear? My voice").

  According to the 7-1th gaming machine, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first sound is output at the first volume and the second sound is output at the second volume. At this time, since the second sound volume is lower than the first sound volume, the player can more easily hear the first sound. When the switching condition is satisfied, the first sound is output at the third volume and the second sound is output at the fourth volume. At this time, since the third sound volume is lower than the fourth sound volume, the player can more easily hear the second sound. In this way, when the switching condition is satisfied, it is possible to change from the state where the first sound is easy to hear to the state where the second sound is easy to hear only by changing the volume. As a result, various effect contents can be realized only by changing the timing of changing the volume using two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound.

[No. 7-2 gaming machine]
The first volume (for example, the normal volume of the volume “255”) and the fourth volume (for example, the normal volume of the volume “255”) are volumes that are audible to the player,
The second volume (e.g., mute volume of volume "0") and the third volume (e.g., mute volume of volume "0") are volumes that are difficult or impossible for a player to hear. 1 gaming machine (1).

  According to the above-described seventh to second gaming machines, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first sound is output at a volume (first volume) audible to the player, and the second sound is generated at the game. It is output at a volume (second volume) that is difficult or impossible for a person to listen to. At this time, the player can easily hear only the first sound. When the switching condition is satisfied, the first sound is output at a volume (third volume) that is difficult or impossible for the player to listen to, and the second sound is output at a volume that is audible to the player ( (The fourth volume). At this time, the player can easily hear only the second sound. In this way, when the switching condition is satisfied, it is possible to change from a state in which only the first sound is easy to hear to a state in which only the second sound is easy to hear only by changing the volume. As a result, various effect contents can be realized only by changing the timing of changing the volume using two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound.

[No. 7-3 gaming machine]
The switching condition (for example, “third stop operation”) is satisfied after the predetermined condition (for example, command numbers “541”, “542”, “641”, and “642” are registered and the start switch is turned on) is satisfied. The 7-1st gaming machine (1), which can be satisfied in a manner in which a time (ΔT1) until a switching condition (for example, “third stop operation”) is satisfied is indefinite.

  According to the above-described seventh to third gaming machines, it is necessary to prepare sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound at each conceivable timing even when the switching condition can be satisfied at an indefinite timing. However, it is possible to efficiently cope with two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound.

[7-4th gaming machine]
Operation means (eg, medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, checkout button, effect button) that can be operated by the player,
The switching condition (for example, “third stop operation”) includes the operation means (for example, medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, settlement button , An effect button), which is established based on the player's operation of the seventh to third gaming machines (1).

  According to the above-described seventh to fourth gaming machines, even when the switching condition can be satisfied at an indefinite timing due to an operation by the player, the first sound and the second sound at each possible timing. It is not necessary to prepare sound data related to the first sound and the two kinds of sound data related to the first sound and the second sound.

[7-5th gaming machine]
The operation means includes an operation button (for example, one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) associated with the first stop operation on the rotating reel, and an operation associated with the second stop operation on the rotating reel. Button (for example, one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) and an operation button (for example, one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) associated with the third stop operation on the rotating reel. The seventh to fourth gaming machines (1).

  According to the above-described seventh to fifth gaming machines, even if the switching condition can be established at an indefinite timing due to the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the like by the player, every possible timing There is no need to prepare sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound, and it is possible to efficiently cope with the two kinds of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound.

[The 7th game machine]
Image control means (for example, a first image effect processing unit 1504) capable of executing control relating to an image,
Image output means (for example, display device 11) capable of outputting an image,
The image control unit (for example, the first image effect processing unit 1504)
When the predetermined condition (for example, the command numbers “541”, “542”, “641”, and “642” are registered and the start switch is turned on) is satisfied, the first condition is output via the image output unit (for example, the display device 11). A process of outputting an image (for example, a video of a scene related to a telephone voice) (for example, the process of step S342 in FIG. 34);
When the switching condition (for example, “third stop operation”) is satisfied, a process of outputting a second image (for example, a video of a scene related to a normal voice) via the image output unit (for example, the display device 11) (for example, FIG. 34, the processing of step S346).
The first image (for example, a video of a scene related to a telephone voice) and the second image (for example, a video of a scene related to a normal voice) output via the image output unit (for example, the display device 11) include: Any one of 7-1 to 7-5, which forms a series of image effects (for example, switching of images of scenes of a person who listens to the phone and a person who speaks the dialogue "Do you hear me? My voice") Gaming machine (1).

  According to the seventh to sixth gaming machines, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a state is formed in which the player can easily hear only the first sound, and the first image is output. Further, when the switching condition is satisfied, a state is formed in which the player can easily hear only the second sound, and the second image is output. In this manner, when the switching condition is satisfied, the state where only the first sound is easily heard and the state where the first image is output are output from the state where only the second sound is easily heard and the state where the second image is easily heard and the second image are output. State can be changed. As a result, using two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound and two types of images, the timing of changing the volume and the timing of switching the images are changed only by changing the timing. It is possible to realize various production contents.

[7-7th gaming machine]
The sound effect is related to the sound of a first character (for example, the character C1),
The image effect is a gaming machine (1) according to a seventh to sixth aspects relating to an utterance scene of the first character (for example, the character C1).

  According to the above-described seventh to seventh gaming machines, it is only necessary to change the timing of changing the volume by using two types of sound data of the first sound and the second sound related to the sound of the first character. Thus, it is possible to realize various effect contents regarding the utterance scene of the first character. For example, even in the case of the voice of the same first character, depending on the scene, changing the way of hearing may produce an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In this regard, according to the above-described gaming machine No. 7-7, by using two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound, it is possible to efficiently realize an effect content without discomfort while switching scenes. It is possible to do.

[7th-8th gaming machines]
The first image (e.g., a video of a scene relating to a telephone voice) relates to a scene in which the first character (e.g., a character C1) is talking on a telephone,
The second image (e.g., a video of a scene related to a normal voice) is a seventh image related to a scene in which a second character (e.g., the character C2) is listening to the voice of the first character (e.g., the character C1) via a telephone. -7 gaming machine (1).

  According to the seventh to eighth gaming machines, a switching timing for switching between a scene in which the first character is talking on the telephone and a scene in which the second character is listening to the voice of the first character over the telephone Is indefinite, it is only necessary to change the timing of changing the volume in accordance with the switching timing using the two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound, and the scene switching is performed. Can be realized. For example, in the scene where the first character is talking on the phone and in the scene where the second character is listening to the voice of the first character over the phone, even if the voice of the same first character is heard, Changing the direction will give the player a sense of comfort. In this regard, according to the above-described seventh to eighth gaming machines, it is possible to realize the effect contents without discomfort by switching scenes using two types of sound data relating to the first sound and the second sound. It becomes possible.

[Eighth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when a winning combination is a winning combination indicating a special winning mode, a timing at which a player's stop operation is detected while a variable display of one identification information sequence is being performed. A game machine that outputs a first sound effect and then outputs a second sound effect at the timing when the player's stop operation is no longer detected (see, for example, JP-A-2007-289490). . The gaming machine having such a configuration is intended to suppress gambling by slowing down the game tempo of the player.

  However, in such a gaming machine as described above, the sound effect expected by the player may not be output, and the interest in the game may be reduced. For example, if the specific production sound can be output only when a certain condition is satisfied, the player may delay the game tempo to satisfy the condition, but for a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo, Therefore, the game is continued without listening to the expected specific effect sound, and the interest in the game may be reduced (fourth problem).

  The present invention has been made to solve the fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to delay a game tempo while suppressing gambling by slowing down a game tempo of a player. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of outputting a specific effect sound to a specific player who does not want to play.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides eighth to eighth to sixth gaming machines having the following configurations.

[The 8th gaming machine]
A gaming machine (1) including sound control means (for example, second sound effect processing units 1502, 1502A) capable of executing control relating to sound, and sound output means (for example, speakers 64L, 64R) capable of outputting sound. ,
The sound control means (for example, the second sound effect processing units 1502, 1502A)
A first process (for example, a normal output process) for outputting a specific effect sound (for example, a speech of a deadly technique) based on the lapse of a predetermined time (ΔT: for example, 3 seconds) from the establishment of the first condition (for example, start switch ON) When,
The specific effect sound is output based on the establishment of a second condition (for example, a third stop operation) before the lapse of the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the establishment of the first condition (for example, start switch ON). The second process (for example, post-output process: the process of step S378 when “YES” in step S376 in FIG. 37 and the process proceeds to step S378) can be selectively executed.
Gaming machine (1).

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine No. 8-1, the specific effect sound is output based on the elapse of the predetermined time from the satisfaction of the first condition. Accordingly, by setting the predetermined time to be relatively long, it is possible to induce a player who wants to hear the specific effect sound to delay the game tempo. Thereby, gambling can be suppressed. On the other hand, the specific effect sound is output based on the establishment of the second condition before a predetermined time has elapsed since the establishment of the first condition. A specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo is likely to establish the second condition before a predetermined time has elapsed since the establishment of the first condition because the game tempo is fast. Also in this case, a specific effect sound is output. Therefore, a specific effect sound can be output to a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo. When the specific effect sound is output based on the establishment of the second condition before the elapse of the predetermined time from the establishment of the first condition, the first process is not selected (executed) and the specific effect sound is output. Duplicate output is prevented. In this way, according to the above-described eighth-type gaming machine, the specific effect sound is also given to a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo while suppressing the gambling property by delaying the game tempo of the player. Can be output.

[The 8th gaming machine]
The gaming machine (1) can provide a bonus (for example, activation of a bonus) to the player based on a predetermined determination (for example, random determination based on a random number),
The 8-1st gaming machine (1), wherein the specific effect sound can indicate an expectation degree to which the privilege is provided.

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine of No. 8-2, the specific effect sound that can indicate the degree of expectation that the privilege is given is likely to be one of the effect sounds that the player wants to hear. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player who wants to hear the specific effect sound to delay the game tempo with a higher probability. Also, the specific effect sound can be output to a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo.

[The 8th gaming machine]
The 8-2th gaming machine (1), wherein the specific effect sound can output different types (for example, three types of command numbers “550”, “551”, and “552”) according to the degree of expectation.

  According to the above-described eighth to third gaming machines, different types of specific effect sounds can be output in accordance with the degree of expectation, and thus the type of the specific effect sound may be one of the elements that the player wants to determine. Is high. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player who wants to hear the specific effect sound to delay the game tempo with a higher probability. Also, a specific effect sound can be output to a specific player who does not want to delay the game tempo so that the type of the specific effect sound can be determined.

[The 8th game machine]
The second condition (for example, the third stop operation) is such that the time from when the first condition (for example, the start switch is turned on) is satisfied to when the second condition (for example, the third stop operation) is satisfied is indefinite. And the 8-1st gaming machine (1) that can be established.

  According to the above-described eighth to fourth gaming machines, if the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is indefinite, the second time before the predetermined time elapses from the satisfaction of the first condition. There may be a case where the condition is satisfied, or a case where the second condition is satisfied after a lapse of a predetermined time from the satisfaction of the first condition. When the second condition is satisfied after a lapse of a predetermined time from the satisfaction of the first condition, the specific effect sound is output by the first process before the second condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when the second condition is satisfied before the elapse of the predetermined time from the satisfaction of the first condition, the specific effect by the second process is replaced with the output of the specific effect sound by the first process (the first process is prohibited). Sound output is realized. Thereby, even when the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is indefinite, the specific effect sound can be output by the first process or the second process.

[The 8th gaming machine]
The second condition is satisfied based on detection of a predetermined operation performed by the player (for example, a third stop operation or insertion of a medal into the medal insertion slot (14)). Gaming machine (1).

  According to the above-described eighth to fifth gaming machines, the second condition is established based on the detection of the predetermined operation performed by the player. The timing for performing the predetermined operation can be adjusted so that the two conditions are not satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to induce the player who wants to hear the output of the specific effect sound by the first process to delay the timing of performing the predetermined operation (as a result, to delay the game tempo).

[The 8th game machine]
The predetermined operation includes an operation of a start lever (16), an operation of an operation button (for example, one of stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) associated with a first stop operation of a rotating reel, and an operation of a rotating reel. The operation of the operation button (for example, one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) associated with the second stop operation, and the operation button (for example, the stop button 17L, 17L, 17C, 17R), the MAX bet button (15a), the 1 bet button (15b), and the medal insertion into the medal insertion slot (14). And the eighth to fifth gaming machines (1).

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine of No. 8-6, since the predetermined operation performed by the player is related to the game tempo, it is possible to easily induce the game tempo to be delayed.

[9th gaming machine]
By the way, in the gaming machine, from the end of the special game state (for example, after the end of the operation of the continuous actor device) to the end of the fixed number of games (for example, 50), the RT state has a high probability of replay winning. There is a specification in which the RT state changes from the high RT state to the non-RT state when the game reaches a high RT state and a fixed specified number of games are completed.

  However, in such a specification, since the number of games in the high RT state is fixed, although there is a sense of security as compared with a specification in which the game can be dropped, there is no change, and it is difficult to enhance interest. In addition, in such a specification, in accordance with the end of the game section in which a fixed specified number of games are performed, for example, from the game before the fixed number to the last game in the game section, the role related to the special game (for example, a big bonus) It is also possible to perform a stir-up effect related to the internal lottery result and perform an effect to notify the internal lottery result in the final game, but in such a case, the game section in which the effect is performed is fixed, and it is difficult to enhance interest. (Fifth task).

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to provide a transition mode of an RT state after the end of a special game state, and an inner part of a role related to a special game. It is an object to enhance interest based on the effect form regarding the lottery result.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides ninth to nineth-fourth gaming machines having the following configurations.

[No. 9-1 gaming machine]
An internal lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means 720) for performing an internal lottery for determining whether or not a plurality of types of winning combinations are accepted when a start operation by the player is detected;
Variable display means (e.g., reels 3L, 3C, 3R) configured by a plurality of display columns and configured to variably display symbols when the start operation is detected;
A game state transition control unit (e.g., a game state transition control unit that transitions a game state between a plurality of types of game states including a normal state and a special game state, and transitions the game state to the special game state when a role related to the special game is won. Gaming state transition control means 770);
A lottery state of a first combination (for example, replay) that enables a replay is defined as a first state (for example, a non-RT state), a second state (for example, an RT1 state) in which a winning probability is higher than the first state, A transition is made between a plurality of states including a third state (for example, an RT2 state) in which a winning probability is higher than the first state, and the lottery state is changed over a predetermined first game section starting after the end of the special game state. Lottery state transition control means (for example, RT control means 773) for setting to the second state;
Effect control means (for example, effect control means 780) for effecting an effect related to the internal lottery result of the role related to the special game,
The lottery state transition control means transitions the lottery state from the second state to the third state when the first game section ends, and sets a symbol combination relating to a predetermined second combination to an active line. When displayed above, the lottery state is shifted from the third state to the first state,
A gaming machine that executes the effect over a predetermined second game section including at least a part of a game section in which the lottery state is set to the third state by the lottery state transition control means; 1).

  According to the above-described 9-1st gaming machine, the lottery state of the first combination enabling the re-game is set to the second state over a predetermined first game section after the end of the special game state, When one game section ends, the state is shifted from the second state to the third state, and when the predetermined combination of symbols relating to the second combination is displayed on the activated line, the state is shifted from the third state to the first state. Is done. In addition, an effect relating to the internal lottery result of the role related to the special game over a predetermined second game section including at least a part of the game section in which the lottery state of the first role enabling the re-game is set to the third state. Is executed. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest based on the transition state of the RT state after the end of the special game state and the effect state regarding the internal lottery result of the hand related to the special game.

[9-2th gaming machine]
The ninth game machine (1), wherein the second game section starts after the first game section ends or after a part of the first game section ends.

  According to the ninth gaming machine described above, when the second game section starts after the end of the first game section, the lottery state of the first combination enabling the re-game is set to the third state. The effect relating to the internal lottery result of the hand related to the special game can be executed only in the game section to be performed. When the second game section starts after the end of a part of the first game section, the lottery state of the remaining game section of the first game section and the first role enabling the re-game is changed to the second lottery state. An effect relating to the internal lottery result of the hand associated with the special game can be executed over the game section set to the three states.

[9th game machine]
The 9-1st gaming machine (1), in which the second gaming section ends when the second combination is won by the internal lottery.

  According to the above-described 9th to 3rd gaming machines, the effect relating to the internal lottery result of the winning combination relating to the special game can be ended in synchronization with the transition from the third state to the first state.

[9th game machine]
A ninth-third gaming machine (1), wherein a maximum length of the second gaming section that can be continued in the non-winning state of the second combination is variable.

  According to the above-described 9th-4th gaming machine, in the non-winning state of the second winning combination, the longest length of the second gaming section is not constant. It becomes easy to increase variations.

[10th gaming machine]
In the related art, it is difficult to expand the range of game properties while suppressing gambling (sixth problem).

  The present invention has been made to solve the sixth problem, and a sixth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding a range of game properties while suppressing gambling. It is.

  In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides tenth to tenth gaming machines having the following configurations.

[No. 10-1 gaming machine]
An internal lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means 720) for performing an internal lottery for determining whether or not a plurality of types of winning combinations are accepted when a start operation by the player is detected;
Control means (for example, effect control means 780) for forming a gaming state advantageous to the player,
The game that can be executed in one game state is a combination of a maximum of a first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) of the first game and a symbol related to a predetermined combination (for example, replay 2) in the first game. The second game, which can be executed a maximum of a second predetermined number of times (for example, 20 × 3 = 60) based on the information displayed above, and the second game until the first predetermined number of times of the first game ends. A third game that can be executed when the predetermined combination has not been won a third predetermined number of times (for example, three times),
The net addition number (for example, about 4) of game media per one game in the second game is larger than 0 and larger than the net addition number (for example, about 1) in the first game, and The gaming machine (1), wherein the net addition number in the game (for example, about 4) is larger than 0 and larger than the net addition number in the first game.

  According to the above-described tenth gaming machine, in the first game in which the net increase is smaller than that in the second game, the predetermined combination does not win the third predetermined number of times (for example, three times). Gaming machine that gives a sense of expectation to the player. In addition, in the former No. 4 machine, when a puncture occurs, there is a puncture with 1G, but the third game can be executed instead of the 1G, thereby widening the range of game characteristics. In addition, by creating a situation in which the predetermined combination is not won because the probability is relatively long, for example, the adjustment of the 2400 advantageous sections MY (the gambling characteristics) that becomes difficult when the first game is a net increase like the second game. Is suppressed). Further, by suppressing the expected value of the number of game media that can be obtained when the predetermined combination does not win the third predetermined number of times in the first game, as compared with the case of the 1G series, it is easy to adjust 2,400 advantageous sections MY.

[10-2 gaming machine]
The second game can be further executed based on a combination of symbols related to the predetermined combination being displayed on an active line in the third game,
When the third game is executed, one game state is determined by the sum of the number of wins of the predetermined combination in the first game and the number of wins of the predetermined combination in the third game is the third predetermined number of times. Is reached when the second game is completed at the second predetermined number of times, and when the predetermined combination is won, the combination of the symbols related to the predetermined combination is not displayed on the activated line. The tenth gaming machine (1), which may be terminated by the third game.

  According to the above-mentioned tenth gaming machine, while the advantage obtained by executing the third game is secured, one gaming state involving the third game is changed to the winning number of the predetermined combination. By terminating the game under appropriate conditions, it is possible to realize a highly fair game in accordance with the number of winnings of the predetermined combination.

[No. 10-3 gaming machine]
The second game is executed every fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) each time a combination of symbols related to the predetermined combination is displayed on the activated line in the first game, and every second time (for example, 20 × 3). = 60 times)
When the third game is not executed, the one game state ends when the second predetermined number of times (for example, the 60th time) ends and the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). The second game may end with the end of the second game at every fourth predetermined number of times after the end of the first game, or may end with the end of the first game at the first predetermined number of times. , A tenth (2) gaming machine.
According to the 10-2th gaming machine described above, the combination of the first game and the second game is realized in a form close to the former bonus game at the fourth machine, and the special combination according to the number of winnings of the predetermined combination is achieved. The game characteristics of the third game can be involved.

[10-4th gaming machine]
The control means shifts the effect state between a plurality of effect states including a special effect state, and effects control means (for example, effect control) for performing a prize assisting effect for assisting winning of a role in the special effect state. Means 780),
The effect control means may be configured to switch the special effect state to a first special effect state (for example, a first AT state) and a second special effect state (a second AT state or a third AT state) having a higher degree of assistance than the first special effect state. ), The difference between the net increase between the first game and the second game and the difference between the net increase between the first game and the third game A gaming machine (1) according to any one of the tenth to the tenth to the (iii).
According to the above-described tenth-fourth gaming machine, a difference in net increase between the first game and the second game or between the first game and the third game can be realized using the so-called AT function.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 6 ... Information display, 11 ... Display device, 17L, 17C, 17R ... Stop button, 64L, 64R ... Speaker, 71 ... Main control board, 72: sub-control board, 86: ROM cartridge board, 90: main control circuit, 91: microprocessor, 101: main CPU, 102: main ROM, 103: main RAM, 150: sub-control circuit, 151: sub CPU, 152 .., Sub RAM, 153, GPU, 154, VRAM, 201, projection block, 202, projection block, 213, projector, 237, reflection mirror, 302, trapezoidal member, 303, pseudo reel member, 304, plane screen member, 305 … Projected member moving mechanism

Claims (4)

Internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine whether or not a plurality of types of winning combinations are determined when a start operation by the player is detected,
Control means for forming a gaming state advantageous to the player,
The game that can be executed in one game state is a maximum of a first predetermined number of first games and a combination of symbols related to a predetermined combination in the first game displayed on the activated line. A second game that can be executed a second predetermined number of times, and a third game that can be executed if the predetermined combination has not been won a third predetermined number of times before the first predetermined number of times of the first game ends. And
The net addition number of game media per one game in the second game is larger than 0 and larger than the net addition number in the first game, and the net addition number in the third game is larger than 0 and A gaming machine that is larger than the net increase in the first game. The second game can be further executed based on a combination of symbols related to the predetermined combination being displayed on an active line in the third game,
When the third game is executed, one game state is determined by the sum of the number of wins of the predetermined combination in the first game and the number of wins of the predetermined combination in the third game is the third predetermined number of times. Is reached when the second game is completed at the second predetermined number of times, and when the predetermined combination is won, the combination of the symbols related to the predetermined combination is not displayed on the activated line. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the third game may end the game. The second game can be executed up to the second predetermined number of times, every fourth predetermined number of times, each time a combination of symbols related to a predetermined combination is displayed on the activated line in the first game,
In the case where the third game is not executed, one game state ends when the second predetermined number of times of the second game ends and after the first predetermined number of times ends in the first game. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the game ends when the second game ends every fourth predetermined number of times, or ends when the first game ends after the first predetermined number of times. 4. The control means includes a production control means for shifting a production state between a plurality of production states including a special production state, and performing a prize assisting production for assisting winning of a role when the special production state is provided,
The effect control means shifts the special effect state between a plurality of states including a first special effect state and a second special effect state having a higher degree of assistance than the first special effect state, The difference between the net increment between the first game and the second game and the difference between the net increment between the first game and the third game are realized. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images